Home

Samsung CLX-8380ND

1. Z a 14 2 Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit 14 3 15 Specifications General specifications PAA oocusertieceeeeeaeeenrenacentie 15 1 Primer SDCCINC ANIONS saa GANAN EEEE NO AA 15 2 COPF SO CCC ANON S AA DAA AGA AA AA AA 15 2 Scanner AA xecseceyecdetscbeceictecisebesaicbcdsedease kredisi eisi AENEAS EENES ELEKE pepin Sabah Ei EEE Edi Edene r eisien ieiki TETES 15 3 Facsimile specifications optional 111 1777171771001 entrene nnne n nnen 15 3 16 Glossary Index About this user s guide This user s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage Both novice users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below e Document is synonymous with original e Paper is synonymous with media or print media The following table offers the conventions of this guide Conventon Dessrpton mame See page 1 1 for Special features Note Used for texts on the screen or actual prints on the machine Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine function and feature Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction Used to provide more detailed information on certa
2. cc cece ccc cece eee teen eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaneeeesgenneeenegs 22 Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size 22222004 42m 22 BI MO eli lg LS AA AA ee 23 Using an Existing Watermark 3 0 cece cece e eee eee eee EE EE DEE E EDDA EE ES DEE ESSE EE SEGRE EES SEER SEES 23 NSCB a Watermark sancti tees nena poeta era sare a arate nie Wire ete inte we Stes re E aa See ees 23 ECMO a NANANG AA GANA AA AA 23 Deleting a Watermark mGA NA KA AKNG BAGAN NANA DA NAA ees 23 USING OVEN DO maman e KATANA KATA DL ANN A GALANG TANA AA AN 24 NAAAGNAS 24 Creating a New Page Overlay 2220000 00000040 an AA eens tees eee eee eee eaeee eee seeeeeeeeseaeeteegenanteesggggs 24 USING a Page Overlay saaan GAGANA NG BAGGAGE NAAN AAEE ENEE 24 Deleting a Page Overlay 2220 0002 cece eee eee e ee eee eee e eee eed EEE EE EDD DEES E EEE DEES EEE SG DEE SEES SSEEE SEES E GEESE ES 24 Chapter 4 USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRIVER PANER SOUIINGS aa NANA ANAN AA vastus AA 25 BONG ma NAP E AE E E T A E E E T 25 SIG RGI aa E E E E AA 25 Chapter 5 USING DIRECT PRINTING UTILITY Overview Direct Printing VEE accasaseatinancencausacsnaiyerectaaseeanaied cobenqaeaeehaanyscausuerecae era seceaueaiys 26 ETUDE KA AA AA oda Von essa PAA PA AA AAP dhacate 26 From the Direct Printing Utility window cc cece ce eece ee ee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeaeeetessaanenensaags 26 LASING THe SHOMCULICON saaan NGA NINANG NEA NAA NAAN
3. 1 5 lt Introduction gt Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons Touch screen The touch screen allows for user friendly operation of the machine Once you press the home icon F on the screen it shows the Main screen E Shows Help You can find the explanation by feature contents e Copy Enters the Copy menu e Fax Enters the Fax menu Optional e Scan Enters Scan to Email NetScan Scan to Server menu e Stored Documents Enters the Stored Documents menu Page 11 2 e USB When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine USB icon shows on the display screen e SmarThru Workflow Enters the SmarThru Workflow menu Optional Toner Info Shows amount of toner used e LCD Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen 4 You can change the display language K Guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the machine Follow the instruction on the LCD This icon appears only when you connect an USB memory module e Logout Logs out from the currently logged in account Note e cons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be grayed out depending on the optional kit or program installed in your machine e To switch the display screen and see other available icons press the right arrow on the display screen Machine Setup button When you press Machine Setup button you can browse current machine settings or change machine values Pa
4. 5 Thoroughly roll the toner cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge den may 5 6 Note If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 1 1 3 lt Maintenance gt 6 Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot inside the machine Insert it back into its slot until it locks in place 7 Close the front cover then the side cover 8 Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on Caution If the cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate Replacing the toner cartridge The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K When the toner cartridge is totally empty e The status LED and the toner related message on the display indicates which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced e The machine stops printing Incoming faxes are saved in memory At this stage the toner cartridge needs to be replaced Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine Page 13 1 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Open the side cover Note Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged Contact a service representative when print qua
5. Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer Install software for a device that is on network You can select installation options This option is recommended for professional users lt Back Cancel 6 The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next 33 Samsung CLX 8380 Series Select Printer Port Select a port that will be used for your printer TCP IP Port C Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port Select a printer from the list below IF you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list IP Port Name NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing the installer from Update detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on this PC before continuing with the installation lt Back New Cancel e If you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer To verify your printer s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration page See page 11 1 for Printing a machine report e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button Note
6. Do not allow anything to rest on the power Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords This can diminish performance and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power telephone or PC interface cords Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings They may touch dangerous voltage points creating a risk of fire or shock Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble the machine Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks Incorrect reassembly could cause electric shock when the unit is subsequently used Unplug the machine from the telephone jack PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions e When any part of the power cord plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed e If liquid has been spilled into the machine e If the machine has been exposed to rain or water If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed e If the machine has been dropped or the cabinet appears damaged e If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance 14 Adjust only those controls covered
7. 5 Enter IP Address or Host Name or Host Name and LDAP server and Port 6 Enter optional information 7 Click Apply Note The LDAP server administrator must store the email address data The method of storing is varies depending on the server and the operating systems Entering email addresses by the address book Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address book you can simply enter email addresses 1 Press Local or Global from the Basic tab of Scan to Email wfolr olels r ul vi w r z The search window shows lt Scanning gt 2 Press the initial alphabet key of the address you are looking for Or press Search to specify the search criteria 7 Wi Cee Mites Hare aheshi bo maectord Total 10 K Ca When the search is completed the screen displays the search results 3 Press From and enter your email address and press OK 4 Select the address you want in the right hand pane and the press To Cc or Bcc in the left hand pane 5 Press Apply Keep selecting addresses as many as you want 6 Press OK Entering email addresses by the keyboard When you press the input field in the From To Cc or message input field the keyboard shows on the display screen The following explanation is the example that you are entering abcdefg abc com 1 Press From in the Basic tab of the Scan to Email i 7 Fenty to Email Chee Munbess F rliy hu
8. COLOR LASER MFP User s Guide CLX 8380 Series 2008 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved This user s guide is provided for information purposes only All information included herein is subject to change without notice Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages arising from or related to use of this user s guide CLX 8380ND is model name of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett Packard company Microsoft Windows Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 2003 and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System Inc UFST and MicroType are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc TrueType LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased Due to different voltage frequency telecommunication configuration and etc contact SAMSUNG worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products contact the Samsung customer care center C
9. If the paper is not feeding properly pull the paper out of the machine 1 bi N N yy W AN KA PD IN ANN Ss SIS Wy y 2 Open and close the side cover Printing automatically resumes NA Ng WA SY ff W OSes oS ESS lt Troubleshooting gt 12 7 In the paper inside the machine Note The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the side cover If you do not see any paper in this area go to step 3 3 Open the guide in the direction shown and pull the jammed paper gently out of the machine 4 Open and close the front cover to resume printing 12 8 lt Troubleshooting gt In the duplex unit area In the fuser area If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly paper jam may occur Make sure that the duplex unit is inserted correctly Open the side cover 1 Open the side cover 1 2 Remove the jammed paper in the direction shown 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close the side cover Printing automatically resumes 3 Close the side cover lt Troubleshooting gt 12 9 Paper jam inside finisher Paper jam inside finisher s duplex In the stacker finisher Open the stacker front cover 1 Paper jam in front of finisher Open the stacker front cover 1 NN NIN IS 2 Pull the stacker leve
10. Page 11 4 DF Booklet The imaging unit is totally out of lifespan Covers Remove the old imaging unit and install a new Transparencies one Page 11 5 AG ase Edge oat The toner cartridge is totally empty Remove Erase Background the old toner cartridge and install a new one Margin Shift Scan Enhance Page 11 4 A paper jam has occurred Page 12 3 The cover is opened Close the cover Stored Documents There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray Public tab Page 11 2 The machine has stopped due to a major a error Check the display message Delete Page 12 11 ai All The waste toner container not installated in Secured tab Page 11 2 the machine or full waste toner container Detail Page 11 7 ae Note Check the message on the display screen and follow the instruction on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part Page 12 1 If the problem persists call for service Basic tab Page 7 1 Advanced tab Page 7 2 Image tab Page 7 2 Output tab Page 7 2 Scan to Server Basic tab Page 7 2 Advanced tab Page 7 2 Image tab Page 7 2 Output tab Page 7 2 1 f lt Introduction gt Machine Setup button When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel the screen displays three menus Machine Status shows the supplies life billing counters and reports Admin Setting lets you set the advanced setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently Usage Page Report can print
11. Sensor failure zzz Call for service Shake xxx toner cartridge Staple cartridge is empty Replace it Staple cartridge is not installed Install it in finisher System error zzz Please turn off then on This IP address conflicts with an IP address already in use Check it Too much paper in finisher stacker Remove printed paper Too much paper in output bin tray Remove printed paper Transfer belt is not valid for this machine Check user guide Transfer belt unit is worn Replace it There is a problem in the sensor signal The toner supply is low Stapler is run out The staple cartridge is not installed There is a problem in the system operation The IP address is used in other place elsewhere The stacker is full of printouts The printed papers are full on the output tray Meaning Suggested solutions Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge Page 11 3 Order Staple Cartridge Page 13 2 And replace it Page 14 2 Install the staple cartridge following the steps explained on the back of the finisher door Page 14 2 If you want to continue the print job and disregard of this error message go to Admin Setting to adjust the option Page 10 2 Turn the machine off and turn it
12. e If you are not sure of IP address contact your network administrator or print network information See page 11 1 for Printing a machine report If you cannot find your machine in network please turn off the firewall and click Update 7 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you so desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Note e If your printer does not work properly after the installation try to reinstall the printer driver See Software section e During the printer driver installation process the driver installer detects the location information for your operating system and sets the default paper size for your machine If you use a different Windows location you must change the paper size to match the paper you usually use Go to printer properties to change the paper size after installation is complete 3 3 lt Getting Started gt Using the SetIP program This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface Especially it is for the network administrator to set several network IPs at the same time The following procedure is based on windows XP If you use Macintosh or Linux OS see Software section Note e You can only use SetIP program
13. e Machine Info tab Displays the detailed information about the machine and some options allows for validating your machine Page 10 2 e Back Returns to the previous screen Admin Setting screen Gives you access to detailed machine settings Note When you press Admin Setting a login message appears If the administrator set the password you have to enter the password every time you want to use Admin Setting Page 3 5 Y Bak e General tab Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as location date time and more Page 10 2 e Setup tab Sets the values for fax network login and an option to service for enabling the feature listed on the screen Print Report tab Prints configuration or font list and displays a report of machine features Page 10 9 e Back Returns to the previous screen 10 1 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt Browsing the machine s status You can browse the machine information and validate some features of the machine 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Machine Status gt the Machine Info tab O Waw Supplies ldo es a Machine Details This option shows the customer support information on the email address and the phone number you stored from Admin Setting Also you can check the machine s serial number or the hardware and software information specification Print Report You can print various helpful and informativ
14. garbled or incomplete Pages print but they are blank The page orientation setting may be incorrect The paper size and the paper size settings do not match The printer cable is loose or defective The wrong printer driver was selected The software application is malfunctioning The operating system is malfunctioning The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner The file may have blank pages Some parts such as the controller or the board may be defective Change the page orientation in your application See the printer driver help screen Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray Or ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed successfully If possible attach the cable and the machine to another computer and try a print job that you know works Finally try a new printer cable Check the application s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected Try printing a job from another application Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and then back on again Redistribute the toner if necessary If necessary replace the toner cartridge Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages
15. to a specified network location 13 2 lt Ordering supplies and accesso 14 Installing accessories Your machine is a full featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs Recognizing that each user may have different requirements however Samsung makes several accessories available to enhance your machine s capabilities This chapter includes e Precautions to take when installing accessories e Installing a memory module e Replacing the Stapler e Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit Precautions to take when installing accessories Disconnect the power cord Never remove the control board cover while the power is being supplied on To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock always disconnect the power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories Discharge static electricity The control board and internal accessories network interface or DIMM are sensitive to static electricity Before installing or removing any internal accessories discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power source If you walk round before finishing the installation repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again Installing a memory module Your machine has a dual in line memory module DIMM slot Use this memory module slot to install addi
16. 2 GB Windows Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB 15 GB Vista 1024 MB Windows Pentinum IV 1 GHz 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 Pentinum IV 2 GHz 2048 MB Note e Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems e Users who have an administrator right can install the software e Windows Terminal Service is compatible with this machine Macintosh Requirement recommended Operating system CPU Intel Processor e 128 MB fora Power PC G4 G5 Power PC based Mac 512 MB e 512 MB for a Intel based Mac 1 GB Mac OS X 10 4 or lower Intel Processor Mac OS X 10 5 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4 G5 512 MB 1 GB lt Software overview gt Linux ee ee RedHat 8 0 9 0 32bit RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4 5 32 64bit Fedora Core 177 32 64bit Mandrake 9 2 32bit 10 0 10 1 32 64bit Mandriva 2005 2006 2007 32 64bit Operating system SuSE Linux 8 2 9 0 9 1 32bit SuSE Linux 9 2 9 3 10 0 10 1 10 2 32 64bit SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9 10 32 64bit Ubuntu 6 06 6 10 7 04 32 64bit Debian 3 1 4 0 32 64bit Pentium IV 2 4GHz IntelCore2 Free HDD space 1 GB 2GB Note e It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working with large scanned images e The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum 2 3 lt Software overview gt 3 Getting Started This chapter gives you s
17. Auto You can switch this mode among color back white and automatic mode Select whether the user print copies in mono or color If you select the Auto mode the machine detects the original document and decide the output is colored or not In this case the copying speed will be reduced Note e When Auto mode is used there maybe some orginals for which the mode is not correctly switched between in color and black white In this case select Color or B W manually as appropriate to the original e Light Dark Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is easier to read when the original contains faint markings and dark images Page 5 4 e Paper Supply Selects the paper supply tray Advanced tab Ready To Copy e ID Copy Prints 2 sided originals on one sheet of paper This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card Page 5 4 e N Up Prints 2 or 4 original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper Page 5 5 e Poster Copy Prints a large image into divided 9 pages Page 5 6 e Clone Copy Prints multiple image copies from the original document on a single page Page 5 6 e Book Copy Allows you to copy an entire book Page 5 6 e Booklet Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1 sided or 2 sided originals Page 5 7 e Covers Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray Page 5 7 e Transparencies Adds a bl
18. Contact a service representative 12 16 lt Troubleshooting gt PDF file does not print correctly some parts are missing in the graphics text or illustrations Before printing the machine emits vapor near the output tray Your machine has an odd smell during initial use The print quality of photos is not good Images are not clear The machine does not print special sized paper such as a billing paper Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing The oil used to protect the fuser is evaporating The resolution of the photo is very low Paper size and paper size setting do not match Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options Note It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image This is not a problem Just keep printing After printing about 100 color pages there will be no more smell It is a temporary issue Reduce the photo size If you increase the photo size in the software application the resolution will be reduced Set the correct paper size in the Custom in the Paper tab in the printer propeties See Software section Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly you may notice a reduction in print quality S
19. Copy Only With All Service scanning service and copy job are disabled Internal Credits It is used when you cancel the job or when the job is cancelled by the device due to insufficient credits coin or is canceled by user s request If you select Enable the machine deposits a credit equal to the number of sheets that did not print out correctly then it prints next job for free for the amount deposited With Disable even if you cancel the printing job the machine includes jammed paper in the count and the cost of printing shall be recovered for the pages already billed Image Counter Depends on whether the machine counts blank white pages It disables Authentication Mode a a Change Admin Password You can change the password for the Admin Setting authentication Optional Service When you want to add the optional features for this machine you have to install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate those features Follow the next steps to enable those features 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Optional Service AG a Enables or disables the Copy menu from the main screen Analog Fax After installing the fax kit select this option Enable to use this machine as a fax machine Enables or disables the Scan to Email menu from the scan s
20. If so scan the document after the received data has been printed Graphics are scanned more slowly than text Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase the speed For details about how to set BIOS refer to your computer user s guide 12 20 lt Troubleshooting gt Suggested solutions Message appears on your computer screen e Device can t be set to the H W mode you want Port is being used by another program Port is Disabled Scanner is busy receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again Invalid handle Scanning has failed e There may be a copying or printing job in progress Try your job again when that job is finished try your job again The selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again The printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on then restart your computer The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off Network Scan problems Suggested solutions You can check the destination for the scanned f
21. If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or you should press the Release port button if you are sure that the port owner is not functioning properly e Check if Gimp Front end has Xsane Device dialog on the Acquire menu If not you should install the Xsane plug in for Gimp on your computer You can find Xsane plug in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CDs or on the Gimp home page For detailed information refer to Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front end application If you wish to use an other kinds of scan applications refer to the Help for application Please avoid changing print job parameters via LPR GUI for example while a print job is in progress Known versions of CUPS server cut off the print jobs whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning Since Unified Linux Driver locks port while printing the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and therefore unavailable for subsequent print jobs If this situation occurred try to release the port Possible Cause and Solution Some color images come out all black Some color images come out in unexpected color The machine does not print whole pages and its output is half page printed This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 05 when the base color space of the document is indexed color space and it is converted through CIE c
22. Nat Seno Malibox Nne Amhemicstion Malbos Paeoode Optional Service x ox i ci Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control panel Up to 20 numbers you can enter Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard It can be either alphabet or number up to 20 digits Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control panel Note If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000 then the machine does not ask passcode for using Mailbox such as storing deleting printing receiving Set Notification option to On if you want to be notified when a fax is received into Mailbox Press OK Storing originals in Mailbox Since you created the mailbox you can store originals in it 1 2 Press Fax from the Main screen Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document faced down Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab Press the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Store F a N Ready to Fax AI mup Mama cannot ba empty Silo Sere to Rene Deyn Pod fren Harma Dakr Poll Feom Pen Remote 6 9 lt Faxing Optional 5 Enter Mailbox No and Passcode which are set from Creating Mailbox in page 6 9 yy Haaay bo Fax Ta Ora Malbos Fitre thou be nalbeled i 6 Press OK Note e Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox Press Fax gt the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Delete enter Mail
23. Optional gt Storing individual fax numbers Speed Dial No 1 Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Individual af nad Dahi Fa Pa bpi rad IHS rr Doty ZH izi DnE 734 Chi Pam UHS w e Edit Changes the ID Speed Dial No and Fax No e New Creates the new Speed Dial No e Delete Deletes the selected Speed Dial No e Search Searches the fax number which currently stored in Individual phonebook When the keyboard pops up enter ID e Detail Shows ID Fax No and Included group information if it is grouped Page 6 7 e Apply Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number list in the Basic tab e Cancel Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen 2 Press New 3 Enter the name of the fax number in the ID field with the pop up keyboard and the fax number in the Fax No area using the number keypad on the control panel OK Cancat i e ID Enters the name e Speed Dial No Is automatically filled with the first free number If you want to assign to a different number use left right arrows e Fax No Enters a fax numbers only the numbers with the area code if necessary 4 Press OK Storing Group fax numbers Group No 1 Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Group 2 Press New Press the input area in Group Dial ID then the keyboard pops up enter the name 4 Select Group Dial No with left right arrows ia ee Group i D ox Cancel Group Dia
24. Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers and select a fax number 7 Press Start when you hear a high pitched fax signal from the remote fax machine Note Color faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually Page 6 6 Automatic resending When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer the machine automatically redials the number To change the time interval between redials and or the number of redial attempts refer to the next following steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press Redial 5 Select Redial Term and Redial Times 6 Press OK Redialing the last number 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab 3 Place the originals face up into the DADF 4 Press the Redial Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers 5 Select a fax number in the list and press OK The machine automatically begins to send Delaying a fax transmission You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF 3 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Delay Send 6 3 lt Faxing Optional 5 Pre
25. The higher value you select the clear result you get But the scanning time may take longer ee Original Size The machine senses and determines the size of the original Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Advanced tab gt Original Size Use up down arrows to go to the next screen Select the appropriate option and press OK A4 m Letter A5 Legal ag JIS B5 Statement ma iam 9 3 lt Using USB flash memory Original Type You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a document being scanned Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Original Type Select the appropriate option and press OK FR Text Phamno Pirebo e Text For originals that have text or line art e Text Photo For originals that have both text and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photographs Color Mode Use this option to scan the original in Mono Gray or Color mode Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Select the appropriate option and press OK BB coo e Color Uses color to display an image 24 bits per pixel 8 bits for each RGB is used for 1 pixel e Gray Uses the black gradation to display an image 8 bits per pixel e Mono Displays an image in black and white 1 bit per pixel Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output If your Original document is light or fade
26. editor and to send the image by email You can also open another image editor program like Adobe Photoshop from SmarThru For details please refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program lt Software overview Printer driver features Your printer drivers support the following standard features e Paper source selection e Paper size orientation and media type e Number of copies In addition you can use various special printing features The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers PCL 6 Toner save Print quality option Poster printing Multiple pages per sheet N up N Fit to page printing Scale printing o X X X X Different source for first page X Watermark x Overlay X X Duplex Store Print Delay Print Spool Print Proof Print Stapler a This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10 3 b The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper System requirements Before you begin ensure that your system meets the following requirements Windows Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems Requirement recommended Operating space Windows Pentium II 400 MHz 64 MB 600 MB Pentium Il 933 MHz 128 MB Pentium III 933 MHz 128 MB 1 5 GB TUNGONG AO il enti CH 256 MB Windows Pentium II 933 MHz 128 MB 1 25 GB to 2003 Server Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB
27. gt Booklet a FF OQ N Press On to activate this feature and select detailed settings for each option e 1 Sided Original Copys on one side of the paper e 2 Sided Original Copys on both sides of the paper 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Note This feature is possible only with A4 Letter Legal Folio Oficio JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 and Statement sized paper Cover copying The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray Covers must be the same size and orientation as the main body of the job 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Select the tray in Paper Supply 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Covers Note Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto you cannot use this feature 5 Press On to use this feature and select detailed settings for each option e Position Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front back or both e Cover Sheet Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided 2 sided or blank paper e Paper Source Select the paper tray where the cover sheet is loaded 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Transparency copying When you prepare transparencies for presentations use this feature to copy the information Note Before you start this
28. or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select Options Select the settings you want from the Options window 33 Using Smart Panel Using Your Printer in Linux You can use your machine in a Linux environment This chapter includes e Getting Started e Installing the Unified Linux Driver e Using the Unified Driver Configurator e Configuring Printer Properties e Printing a Document e Scanning a Document Getting Started The supplied CD ROM provides you with Samsung s Unified Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux computer Samsung s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and scanner drivers providing the ability to print documents and scan images The package also delivers powerful applications for configuring your machine and further processing of the scanned documents After the driver is installed on your Linux system the driver package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously The acquired documents can then be edited printed on the same local or network machine devices sent by e mail uploaded to an FTP site or transferred to an external OCR system The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible installation program You don t need
29. transparencies Scaling Printing Scaling Printing allows you to automatically or manually scale your print job on a page You can choose from None Reduce Enlarge and Fit to Page e For details see Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document on page 22 e For details see Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size on page 22 Graphics Tab Use the following Graphic options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs See Printing a Document on page 14 for more information on accessing printer properties Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below Pai Printing Preferences Layout Paper Graphic Extras About Quality O Draft Color Grayscale Copies Setting C Manual Letter 8 50 x 11 00 in O mm G inch Copies 1 Quality Normal Favorites Printer Default Advanced Options ELECTRONICS Quality The Quality options you can select may vary depending on your printer model The higher the setting the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document Color Mode You can choose color options Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents If you want to print a color document in grayscale select Grayscale If you want to adjust the color options manually select Manual and click the Color Adjust or Color Matchin
30. 3 Click the Extras tab 4 Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop down list box 5 If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay list click Edit button and Load Overlay and select the overlay file If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source you can also load the file when you access the Load Overlay window After you select the file click Open The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing Select the overlay from the Overlay List box 6 If necessary click Confirm Page Overlay When Printing If this box is checked a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected the overlay automatically prints with your document 7 Click OK or Yes until printing begins The selected overlay downloads with your print job and prints on your document NOTE The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay Deleting a Page Overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use In the printer properties window click the Extras tab Click the Edit button in the Overlay section Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box Click Delete Overlay When a confirming message window appears click Yes Click OK until you exit th
31. 6 using power save mode 3 6 10 3 print media guidelines 4 4 media sizes 4 4 selecting print media 4 2 specification 4 3 print report accounting reports 10 9 configuration report 10 9 e mail confirmation report 10 9 fax report 10 9 11 1 from the website 11 9 network auth log report 10 9 network configuration 10 9 PCL font list 10 9 PS3 font list 10 9 scan report 11 1 scan to server confirmation 10 9 Schedule jobs report 10 9 supplies information 10 9 system report 11 1 usage page report 10 9 Printer software CD 2 1 printing 8 1 problem solving 12 15 USB memory 9 5 problems copying 12 20 display message 12 11 faxing 12 21 Linux 12 23 Macintosh 12 25 network scanning 12 21 paper feeder 12 15 PostScript 12 22 printing 12 15 printing quality 12 17 scanning 12 20 touch screen 12 15 Windows 12 22 Q quality scanning 7 9 9 4 solving the printing problem 12 17 R Redial Pause 1 5 remote code 10 4 replacing waste toner container 11 7 replacing components imaging unit 11 5 toner cartridge 11 4 replacing stapler 14 2 Report 10 9 Resolution faxing 6 6 scanning 7 8 9 3 S Scan to Email 7 4 confirmation 10 9 Scan to Server 7 7 confirmation 10 9 scanned file format 7 9 9 5 scanning color mode 7 8 9 4 darkness 7 9 9 4 enabling the scan kit option 10 7 erasing background 7 9 9 4 file format 7 9 9 5 original size 7 8 9 3 original type 7 8 9 4 printing an email
32. AAP 9 4 COE UOO AA AA AA 9 4 ANE E E E A A afvenncnaiaanendaieucsedtaenenAeeseaceds 9 4 CAIN aie EN AA EA EE AE E EE E O A A 9 4 PIE FOI I ea E E E dada hia aayedlaee da arena ond uceavandionean aes 9 5 PIG OIG AA AA AA AA 9 5 Printing from a USB memory device u 11 110 9 5 To print a document from a USB memory device 11 11 9 5 Machine status and advanced setup Machine Setup aaa AA AG AA AA ARN og 10 1 Machine SUS SOU OID aaa AA AA AN Aa AA 10 1 Amin Sein SEEN aa AA AG LAGA E aaa AA Anata 10 1 Browsing the machine S status La AA AA AA 10 2 OSV TAS SIN Oh Baa AA NAA NAA AA AG 10 2 OO ONID oe ces ects nA AA E AA AA AA AA 10 4 PAG ID AA Aa AA AA AA AA AG 10 4 NGO UI pa AA AA AA AGA 0a ASO 10 6 ANAL a E E E A EEE P EAE EE E EEA 10 6 Optional Servite a AA AA ee ee AA AA 10 7 Adjusting ENE color COMMASE sicssscscscdaxcueaesiarecsesaasaconaaiaudaraniuamadaeinciaoelesntunguwaadsdenasantapadanaaniaedanas aaniaaasensauaresedneensuaeabies 10 8 PANNO aT ONG Ha NA KA te ante Gain ste Klean pons ale AA AA Ana 10 9 11 Maintenance Piniga Machine TEDO sincasetstsmenttamesinautstncaaansaainencaerarian A BANNA GAGA ANGKAN TAN ADA NANA AA 11 1 Monitoring the supplies ENNA ANAN ALA AA 11 1 FING Mhe seral NUMDET AA 11 1 Sending the imaging unit reorder notification 12100 2 2 2 X0 rrera 11 1 Sending the toner reorder notification cccccecccccsssececcceseececeesececceuececsceeeeecsusececseaeeeesseus
33. Enlarged Document You can change the size of a page s content to appear larger or Smaller on the printed page l To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 2 From the Paper tab select Reduce Enlarge in the Printing Type drop down list 3 Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box You can also click the w or button 4 Select the paper source size and type in Paper Options 5 Click OK and print the document Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 From the Paper tab select Fit to Page in the Printing Type drop down list Select the correct size from the Output size drop down list Select the paper source size and type in Paper Options Click OK and print the document ul amp U N Using Watermarks The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you may want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document There are several predefined watermarks tha
34. Next Cancel e After connecting the printer click Next e If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation e The reinstallation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use 5 Select the components you want to reinstall and click Next If you installed the printer software for local printing and you select your printer driver name the window asking you to print a test page appears Do as follows a To print a test page select the check box and click Next b If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If it doesn t click No to reprint it 6 When the reinstallation is done click Finish Installing Printer Software in Windows Removing Printer Software Start Windows From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs your printer driver name Maintenance Select Remove and click Next You will see a component list so that you can remove any item individually Select the components you want to remove and then click Next When your computer asks you to confirm your selection click Yes The selected driver and all of its components are removed from your computer After the software is removed click Finish 12 Installing mono printer driver This printer provides yo
35. SYN PATENT KENA AA 5 Installing Software for Local Printing cece ccc ccce cece eect eee eeee eee eeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeeesanneeesugags 5 Installing Software for Network PINUNO ciisisansnsascsccansdsautosen miner earnaeveneenennienatieietiire KG 8 Reinstalling Printer Software 0 222 20 eee eee eee e eee eee e eee e ee ee DEES EES a SE EEE EES G ESSE ES SSEEE SESS GEES SEES SGEEEEE EES 11 REMOVING Printer SOMWOlC asan GE prite ANTENA ENE NENEA NS ca sowertou sion sib teen AGA GAAN 12 installing MONO printer CVE 2w GA KB QA DNA NANALANGIN AD KATANA AA 12 Chapter 2 BASIC PRINTI NG Banna DOCUMEN aaa NA NANANA NANA NANA ANAN 14 PANUNG a MEGAIPRN maka NAKAKAIN E E E EE O 14 PANES ENGE PANGKAT TINIYAK NANANA DQ NAN NANDO NAA E ANN MANANAIG 15 LO OUR LAO A PAANAN acer raree rae A EA AA E EA EE 15 POPE TON ANGGE NGA AA AA GG 16 GPMS TAD mania PANA ANA ANA AA rT ren 17 PAGG ANGGE AA AA ee ee 18 POOU TOL nm AANI EEE EN 18 Per TaD a AA AA GAGANA NA 18 Using a Favorite SELLING masasaaanaa NGGGG DGmGA NINALDPNN ALING ILANG PAETE TGA PIE NA KA AL Kh hina 19 Wis aes et ee ee AANGAL PAA AK GA NAA AN ANAN E E AA 19 Chapter 3 ADVANCED PRINTING Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing 2000 42 20 PARCTNGUROSLERS panama ANN GANAN NA ANAN ANAN NANA AA 21 PINUNO TOOTS aaa AGA AA EN AAAA E A EEEE AA NAAN 21 PRIME Ol BO OCS OF PIPE aaa TANA AA A eens 22 Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document
36. Standard Up to 203 x 98 dpi Fine Up to 203 x 196 dpi Super Fine Fine photo Up to 300 x 300 dpi Up to 406 x 392 dpi Up to 203 x 392 dpi Rx only Resolution Standard Up to 200 x 200 dpi Fine Up to 200 x 200 dpi Super Fine Up to 200 x 200 dpi 256 levels HDD Stroe 500 jobs Up to 200 numbers a Standard resolution MMR JBIG Maximum modem speed Phase C by ITU T No 1 chart Memory Tx ECM b Rx stands for receiving a fax Halftone Memory Auto dialer Speed Dial 15 2 lt Specifications gt 1 6 Glossary Note The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map 1 bit color is common
37. a fax header 6 2 fax setup 10 4 faxing color mode 6 6 darkness 6 6 duplex 6 5 enabling the fax kitoption 10 7 14 3 erasing background 6 6 original type 6 6 phonebook 6 6 printing a fax report 11 1 resolution 6 6 solving faxing problems 12 21 FDI authentication 10 7 dummy 1 4 FDI Foreign Interface Device ordering 1 2 13 2 finisher Stacker amp Stapler connection 1 4 ordering 1 2 13 2 paper jam 12 10 front cover 1 3 FTP 7 7 G general settings 10 2 Gray scan 7 9 9 4 Group Group fax number 6 7 ID copy 5 5 ID stamp in copying 10 4 Individual email addresses for scanning 7 5 individual fax number 6 7 Interrupt 1 5 jam clearing paper from the duplex unit area 12 9 clearing paper from the exit area 12 8 clearing paper from the fuser unit 12 9 clearing paper from the multi purpose tray 12 7 clearing paper from the optional tray 12 5 12 6 clearing paper from the stacker finisher 12 10 clearing paper from the tray1 12 3 clearing the original from DADF 12 1 clearing the original from scanner glass 12 2 tips for avoiding paper jams 12 11 Job Status 1 5 1 8 JPEG 7 9 9 5 K keyboard 3 L language 3 6 LED 1 5 Interrupt 1 6 Power Saver 1 6 Status 1 7 LINE socket 1 4 Linux problems 12 23 requirements 2 3 M Machine Info 10 1 Machine Setup 1 8 10 1 machine status 10 2 machine setup Admin Setting 1 8 Machine Status 1 8 Macintosh problems 12 25 requirements 2 2 Mailbo
38. address Media Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e g 00 00 0c 34 11 4e This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks MFP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc MH Modified Huffman MH is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU T T 4 MH is a codebook based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information MR Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4 MR encodes the first scanned line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and transmitted NetWar
39. advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http Awww openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without 5 prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 6 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 7 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENC
40. at exit of finisher 1 Gently pull the paper out through the exit area e You may see an exclamation mark 4 or a cross mark GP on the upper left of the display in that case press the question mark to browse detailed information on the supplies yyy is worn Replace with new one xxx imaging unit is empty Replace it xxx imaging unit is not compatible Check useris guide xxx imaging unit is not installed Install it xxx imaging unit is worn Replace with new one The life of the part expires totally The toner in the imaging unit has run out The imaging unit you have installed is not for your machine The imaging unit is not installed or the CRUM Consumer Replaceable Unit Monitor in the cartridge is not connected The imaging unit is at the end of its life When the imaging unit replacement message appears on the screen and if you select Continue this message displays Replace the part with a new one Call for service Replace the imaging unit with a Samsung genuine toner cartridge Install a Samsung genuine imaging unit designed for your machine Install the imaging unit If it is already installed try to reinstall the imaging unit If the problem persists please call for service Replace a imaging unit with a Samsung genuine imaging unit Page 11 5 12 11 lt Troubleshooting gt xxx toner cartridge i
41. click Next Installing Printer Software in Windows NOTE If you have installed a mono driver before then the Use Existing Driver window Select as the window explains and click Next Also depending on your computer configuration the printer sharing window or the print the test page window may appear make the appropriate selection 14 Enter your printer name and click Next 15 Click Finish to start installing a mono printer driver NOTE If your printer is connected to a network go to printer s Properties and select the Ports tab then click Add Portand Standard TCP IP Port and create a new port to connect to the printer To create a new port follow the procedure laid out in the wizard window 13 Installing Printer Software in Windows 2 Basic Printing This chapter explains the printing options and common printing tasks in Windows This chapter includes Printing a Document Printing to a file PRN Printer Settings Layout Tab Paper Tab Graphics Tab Extras Tab About Tab Printer Tab Using a Favorite Setting Using Help Printing a Document NOTE e Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window is similar Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Pri
42. connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service the internal website IP address An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard IPM The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making ita much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN ISO The Int
43. data If this option is On the machine sounds from a fax starts until a fax finishes With Comm the machine sounds only until the communication is succeeded No sound with Off option This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to five digits This number will be dialed before any automatic number is dialed User may set this to access a PABX example 9 or area code number example 02 a Baan Junk Fax Setup Ring Volume Dial Tone Volume Mailbox Setup Output Tray Toll Save Send Batch Fax Forward Settings Fax Ending Sound Rx Color Printing The machine does not accept faxes sent from remote stations if their numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax numbers You can enter a maximum of 10 junk fax numbers Press Junk Fax Setup and Edit then enter the fax numer If you have set Caller ID enabled you can browse the last received fax numbers and select a fax number from the list This feature adjusts the ring volume When you select Off the machine does not ring When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax you can hear a specific tone To adjust the tone volume you can use this feature e Document Policy You can set the document stored in Mailbox to delete or retain documents after Select On of each option to delete Off to remain the data Mail Configuration You can create edit or delete Mailbox Enter Mailbox ID Mailbox Name Mailbox Passcode by pressing options Page 6 9 Note If you
44. differ depending on printers The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper Select Layout from the Presets drop down Pages per Sheet 1 Two Sided Off ali T fesi Layout Direction a n N Border None Long edged binding O Short edged binding C PDFv Preview A Mac OS 10 4 column 44 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh ePages per Sheet This feature determines how many pages printed on one page For details see Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper on the next eLayout Direction You can select the printing direction on a page as like the examples on Ul Graphics The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Resolution Quality and Color Mode Select Graphics form the Presets drop down list to access the graphic features Printer Hg Presets Standard 134 Graphics 4 Quality OD Best sS Normal Color Mode 999 Color Grayscale D PDFv Preview Cancel AMac OS 10 4 eResolution Quality You can select the printing resolution The higher the setting the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document Color Mode You can set the color options Setting to Color typically
45. different name that is automatically programmed e Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information You can change the country then some the values for fax and paper size will be changed automatically for your country After installing the fax kit you must change the country lt Machine status and advanced setup gt Copy Setup Fax Setup For copy output you can set up several options in advance This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax system You can change the default settings for your preferences and 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel needs 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel password and press OK 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Copy Setup lena Setup Secure Aroma Fax Setup Network Setup Neto Amara Foei F ax L famote Coc Panting Panhentication Error Corechon Opti 15 Mode Kecetve Header Hecke w z Page Number Note The fax options are different from country to country depending on the international communication regulatory If Time amp Date Set this option On in order to print the date and the display screen does not show or gray out some of the time on each copy set from the General tab fax options explained herein it means that the
46. downloading fonts takes time selecting this option can speed up your printing time When using Printer fonts the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory If however you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident in the printer your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer driver e Save as Form for Overlay Select Save as Form for Overlay to save the document as a form file C FORMOVER FOM Once this option is selected the printer driver requires the file name and the destination path each time you print If you want to preset the file name and specify the path click on the button in the Output to area and type the file name and specify the path This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer driver Job Setting Job Setting dialog allows you to select how to print or save the printing file by using the optional HDD Some printers do not support this feature Using Onscreen Help File For more information about J ob Setting click at the top right corner of the window The Job Setting Help window opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the J ob Setting About Tab Use the About tab to display the copyright notice and the version number of the driver If you have an Internet browser you can connect to the Internet by clicki
47. e Color Paper 20 Ib to 24 Ib 75 90 g m2 color backgrounded paper Advanced Paper Options Page This property allows you to print the first page using a different paper type from the rest of the document You can select the paper source for the first page For example load thick stock for the first page into the Multi purpose Tray and plain paper into Tray n Then select Tray n in the Source option and Multi Purpose Tray in the First Page option Cover This property provides you to print a cover page using a specific paper size and type from a specific paper source which you selected If you configure the options to make printing on two sided the first 2 pages or the last 2 pages of document will be used as a front or back cover e No Covers Prints the document without covers Front Cover Prints the document with a front cover The front cover can be a blank paper or the first page in the document Back Cover Prints the document with a back cover The back cover can be a blank paper or the last page in the document Front and Back Cover Prints the document with a front cover and a back cover The covers can be blank papers or the first and the last pages in the document Transparency Separator e No Separator Does not place separator sheets between transparencies e Printer Separator Places the same image on the divider sheets as printed on the transparency e Blank Separator Places a blank sheet between
48. either sending a fax Setting up an e mail account To scan and send an image as an email attachment you need to set up network parameters using SyncThru Web Service 1 Nn a Oo A W N Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service Click Machine Settings gt E mail Setup Select IP Address or Host Name Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 7 4 lt Scanning gt The default port number is 25 8 Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require authentication 9 Enter the SMTP server login name and password 10 Click Apply Note If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3beforeSMTP check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication a Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name b Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 25 Storing email addresses There are two kinds of email addresses Local on your machine s memory and Global on the LDAP server which differ depending on where they are stored Local is that email addresses are stored in the machine s memory and Global is that email addresses are stored in the certain LDAP server Through the SyncThru Web Service you can easily enter and store email addresses f
49. em O rm DADF Capacity DADF document size Paper input Capacity Paper output Capacity Power rating Power consumption Default time to power save mode from lower power mode Up to 100 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond e Width 69 2 7 inches to 216 8 5 inches mm Length 145 5 7 inches to 356 14 0 inches mm Tray 1 520 multi page for plain paper 80 g m 20 Ib bond Multi purpose tray 100 multi page for plain paper 80 g m 20 Ib bond Optional tray 2 3 520 multi page for plain paper 80 g m 20 Ib bond Optional High capacity tray 2 100 multi page for plain paper 80 g m 20 Ib bond For details about paper input capacity see page 4 3 e 500 sheets face down e 500 sheets optional stacker AC 110 127 V or AC 220 240 V See the Rating label on the machine for the correct voltage frequency hertz and type of current for your machine e Average operation mode Less than 1000 W e Power save mode Less than 80 W e Standby mode Less than 196 W e Power off mode 1 W 30 Minutes en Noise level Standby mode 43 dB A e Printing mode 54 dB A e Copying mode 57 dB A Boot up time e Less than 30 seconds from sleep mode e Less than 120 seconds from power off The boot up time will be longer if data volume is a lot in the HDD Operating Temperature 10 C to 32 C 50 F to 89 6 F environment i Humidity 20 to 80 RH Humidity 20 to 80 RH to 80 RH Dis
50. file format resolution and more You can adjust options to fit each specific purpose Page 7 9 e Back Returns to the previous screen 7 2 lt Scanning gt User authentication for network scanning To send an email FTP SMB or Network you must register authorized local or network users using SyncThru Web Service If user authentication has been activated only authorized local users or on the DB server SMB LDAP Kerberos can send scanned data to the network email FTP SMB For network scanning using the authentication feature you must register the network or local authentication configuration using the SyncThru Web Service User authentication has 3 options none Default network authentication and local authentication Registering local authorized users 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine Click Machine Settings Select Local Authentication on the General Setup of the User Authentication web page Click Add Select an index number corresponding to the location for storing the entry from 1 to 500 Enter your name auth ID password e mail address and phone number You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the machine when you start scanning to email from the control panel Click Apply Register authorized network users 1 os 4 5 6 7 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL i
51. for further information on Windows error messages Note To receive a printed or screen displayed message when PostScript errors occur open the Print Options window and click the desired selection next to the PostScript errors section PostScript file cannot be printed Limit Check Error message appears A PostScript error page prints The optional tray is not selected in the driver Window Macintosh The PostScript driver may not be installed correctly The print job was too complex The print job may not be PostScript The printer driver has not been configured to recognize the optional tray The machine does not staple correctly when printing more than one copy from Acrobat Reader with a collate option The machine does not staple correctly when printing more than one copy with a collate option e Install the PostScript driver referring to Software section Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for printing If the problem persists contact a service representative You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine Open the PostScript driver properties select the Device Settings tab and set the Tray option of the Installable Op
52. grayed out function does not supported in your communication This option is used to set words or a message environment to print on your copies Set this option On and message using the pop up keyboard Machine ID amp Enter the machine ID name and fax number Manual ID Copy This option sets the ID copy settings such as Fax No which will be printed at the top of each page Setup the number of images or copying positions manually Page 5 5 Receive Start This feature works best when you are using an Code extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine Page 6 5 Error Correction It helps with poor line quality and makes sure Mode any faxes you send are properly transmitted to any other ECM equipped fax machines Sending a fax using ECM may take more time Fax Initial Setup You can set Receive Mode for Telephone Fax or Answering Machine Fax and Dial Mode at either Tone or Pulse When you select Answering Machine Fax you can receive a fax while the line is being used by the answering machine Page 6 4 Contact your local telephone company for Dial Mode setting information 10 4 Machine status and advanced setup gt ee a Ring to Answer Receive Header Secure Receive Received Fax Printing Speaker Volume Prefix Dial You can specify the number of t
53. gt Poll from Remote Dekh Pod fren Rants Leki Pool Hem Pent Ramota 6 8 lt Faxing Optional Enter Remote Fax No Mailbox No and Passcode All these field are filled with information from the sender 9 Ready to Fax Group Nama cannot be empty x C Note You can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the remote machine s Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours Press OK Using Mailbox You can store the original data in Mailbox since you are absent and the receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you This feature allows you to program up to 15 individual Mailbox Before you store the originals the Mailbox must be created Creating Mailbox 1 O a A QO Press Machine Setup on the control panel Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter the password and press OK Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press the down arrow to scroll down if necessary Press Mailbox Setup Press Mailbox Configuration Then the screen displays Mailbox List Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List F Paman Setting nup Ais cannot be ennty Copy Selup Nag 1 PBA e a biit Mimi 1 NG Paa Seedy ME Kataori Salun Dndata Palihan 4 kE Authentication 4 MA KEG KGG pe tat 8 10 11 12 13 Press Edit Mailbox 9 Admin Setting NI One Mailbox Entry should be selected Copy Setup _ Mabor D Notification Fax Setup
54. has a help screen that can be activated by clicking the Help button in the printer properties window These help screens give detailed information about the printer features provided by the printer driver You can also click from the upper right corner of the window and then click on any setting 19 Basic Printing Advanced Printing This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing tasks NOTE e Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window is similar e If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM This chapter includes e Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing e Printing Posters e Printing Booklets e Printing on Both Sides of Paper e Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document e Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size e Using Watermarks e Using Overlays 20 NI D Advanced Printing Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print more than one page per sheet the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet 1 To change the print settings from your software application access pri
55. in step 7 16 Click Apply Scanning and sending to SMB FTP server 1 Press Scan from the Main screen Note If the authentication message shows enter User Name and Password This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service Page 11 9 2 Press Scan to Server 3 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can place a single original document face down on the scanner glass 4 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab 5 Select Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab 6 Press Scan to Server to show the SMB server list you entered in the SyncThru Web Service ich Heady bo Sean ie Dna Mhalibos Eire should ba wiecie 7 Select the destination SMB server Note You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or FTP servers 8 Press Start on the control panel The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server 1 1 lt Scanning gt Changing the scan feature settings This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job such as resolution duplex original size type color mode darkness and more The options you change will be maintained for a certain time but after that period the options will be reset to default values Duplex This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned are two sided You can select whether the machine scans only o
56. in the office The person who wants to receive the document calls the machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the document be sent In other words it polls the machine holding that has the original Note To use this feature both the sender and receiver must have the polling feature The polling process is as follows 1 Sender stores the originals in the machine Page 6 8 2 Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver 3 Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when requested Page 6 8 4 Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax Storing the originals for polling 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 3 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Polling gt Store a Heady to Fax Gon Mama cano ba empty aor Pal irom Ramos Dirikan Sire Delay Sarid Pionty Sand o Delay Poll From Masa a a Denie ET Paling Madhoa Bak 5 Press the input area then the pop up keyboard enter Passcode The four digit number which you have to inform the receiver If you do not want to set Passcode enter number 0000 here Then you can store delete print and receive a fax for polling without any passcode Note If you want to use the Mailbox refer to Storing the originals in the Mailbox Page 6 9 6 Sel
57. input tray upwards and pull the document gently out of the DADF scanner lid if you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to step 3 3 Open the white document background 4 Close the DADF cover and the document input tray Then place the documents back in the DADF 12 2 lt Troubleshooting gt 4 Remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling 5 Close the white document background and the scanner lid Then load the removed pages back into the DADF Clearing paper jams When a paper jam occurs the warming message appears on the display screen Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam Paper Jam in tray 1 In the paper feed area Page 12 3 Paper Jam in tray2 tray 1 optional tray Page 12 5 Paper Jam in tray 2 HCF or muii purpose tay Page 126 Paper Jam in tray3 Page 12 7 Paper Jam in MP tray Paper Jam in exit area In the fuser area Page 12 9 Paper Jam inside of machine In the paper inside the Page 12 8 machine Paper Jam at the bottom of In the duplex unit Page 12 9 duplex path Paper Jam at the top of duplex path Paper Jam inside of duplex path Paper jam in front of finisher Paper jammed in the Page 12 10 stacker Paper jam inside finisher Paper jammed in the Page 12 10 Paper jam inside finisher s stacker duplex Paper jam at exit of finisher Paper jammed in the Page 12 11 stacker ex
58. installation 7 Installing Printer Software in Windows Installing Software for Network Printing When you connect your printer to a network you must first configure the TCP IP settings for the printer After you have assigned and verified the TCP IP settings you are ready to install the software on each computer on the network You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method Typical I nstallation This is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed l Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on For details about connecting to the network see the supplied printer s User s Guide 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows Vista click Start All programs 5 Accessories 5 Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below English Cancel e If necessary se
59. m 37 to 39 Ib 100 sheets of 80 g m bond 20 Ib paper for the tray1 20 sheets of 80 g m2 20 Ib in the multi purpose tray Labels Letter Legal US Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib 100 sheets of 80 g m Folio A4 JIS B5 bond 20 Ib paper for the tray1 ISO B5 Executive 10 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib A5 Statement in the multi purpose tray Card stock Letter Legal US Refer to the Plain paper section e 90 to 163 g m 24 to 43 Ib 50 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib Folio A4 JIS B5 bond for the tray1 paper for the tray1 ISO B5 Executive e 90 to 220 g m 24 to 58 Ib 10 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib A5 Statement Post bond for the multi purpose in the multi purpose tray Card 4x6 tray Minimum size custom 98 x 148 mm 3 86 x 5 83 inches 60 to 220 g m 16 to 58 Ib bond Maximum size custom 216 x 900 mm 8 5 x 35 43 inches a Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight thickness and environmental conditions b High capacity feeder is not supported Ab 4 3 lt Loading originals and print media gt Media sizes supported in each mode Copy mode Letter A4 Legal Folio Tray 1 Oficio Executive ISO Optional tray B5 Ab Multi purpose tray High capacity feeder Single side All sizes supported by Tray 1 printing the machine Optional tray Multi purpose tray High capacity feeder Duplex printing Letter A4 Legal Folio Tray 1 Oficio JIS B5 ISO B5 Optional tra
60. naire Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver u 2222 00 eee e cece eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeessaeeeeesgeeeeeeeganeeeengas Using the Unified Driver CONNGUIOLOF aaa GANANG Ee N a ETONE Opening the Unified Driver Configurator ssssssesrrrrsrrrresrrrrrerrrrerrrrrsrrrresrrrrerrrrrerrrrrerrrre Panters ConNgUraCIOD ssrcgrrrsrrir tiren APAPAP ADAN NAA AAE AES MES COMCO aeaa E E TE A ETAN PONS SOU ION ma AA AA AA ANA ANG EE ETE E E E E EEE AE Connguring Printer Pro pene GANANG NTG GONG NENA TANAN NAN GUAN Kan An NA pananaga DOCUMENT aa AANI PANATA ANAN AATE EEA PARN APOC DON am GANAN AA AA AAO PUNUAN PICS aamin Ama TA DINADATNAN APAT AA AA sec Alala OCS AA AA EEE EEE Using the Image Manager cccc cece cece BAGA USING YOUR PRINTER WITH A MACINTOSH ISLANG SONWORE AABANG E GN NAAN kA UAN AUDI SONWALE sais tect ANING PAANAN en las SUNG UD ENE PINEL aseeersaconeeynrcessase DpKGGPLOT ONE ON PAKALAT PANTAPAT NGA cn meaeiis For a Network connected 002000 rrinte nrrrorrrrrrrrrrernrrrrrrrrrerrrrene O a AA sororsinoriEner a aia en unin sein EN eed PANGNGALAN AA AN Pann a POCUMENE saga MANA LANANG PAG changing Printer sels AA AA AA APA Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet Of Paper 2222200000000003 saaan DURIAN Ka AA AA ANAN SCANNING tatewiteisipsiviraiointionn Scanning with USB Scanning with network Installing Printer Software in Windows This chapter includes e Installing Printer Software e Reinsta
61. on the scanners list e Check if your machine is attached to your computer Make sure that it is connected properly via the USB port and is turned on Check if the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system Open the Unified Driver configuration tool switch to Scanner configuration then press Drivers Make sure that the window lists a driver with a name corresponding to your machine s name Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access to different consumer applications using the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them is allowed to gain control over the device at a time The other consumer will encounter a device busy response This usually happens while starting the scan procedure and an appropriate message box appears To identify the source of the problem you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner The port symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied with some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or you should
62. one sheet of paper 2 Press Scan from the Main screen Note If the authentication message shows enter User Name and Password This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service Page 11 9 3 Press Scan to Email 4 Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs Page 7 2 5 Press the Basic tab to enter the email address Heady to Ermal mo Orea Munsee EAR hud bo wakita e From Sender s address Touch From and then the keyboard pops up on the screen Use the pop up keyboard to enter your email addresses Or you can use Local and Global to enter the addresses easily Page 7 5 e To Cc Bcc Recipient s email address manually with the pop up keyboard or by pressing Local or Global Local or Global addresses are pre loaded address lists from your computer or the LDAP server which is configured at Web UI Page 7 5 e Subject Title of email e Message Enters the text which will be as the contents of the email The maximum size is 1KB Note To delete previously entered contents press Remove All Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution e Duplex Sets this option for originals that are printed on one side only or on both sides e Resolution Sets the scanning resolution by pressing left right arrows Press the Start button to scan and send the file Note While the machine is sending an email you cannot do the copy job
63. paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray e If you are using transparencies try another type of transparency Because of the composition of transparencies some character voids are normal You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it around The paper may not meet paper Ensure that the paper is loaded properly specifications Page 4 3 Check the paper type and quality Page 4 3 Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also appeal try rotating the paper 180 in the tray e The imaging unit may be installed improperly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it The imaging unit may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one Page 11 4 Back of printouts Check for leaking toner Clean the inside of If the problem persists the machine may are dirty the machine Contact a service require repair Contact a service representative representative If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine AaBbCc e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also AaBbCc try rotating the paper 180 in the tray AaBbCc Solid Color or e The imaging unit may not be installed Black pages properly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it An unknown image Your machine is probably being used at an The imaging unit may be defective and need repetitively appe
64. public circuit switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard Resolution The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution SMB Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to share files printers serial ports and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address TCP IP The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF T
65. ready mode Then close the scan lid and turn the power off And open the scan lid and lock the scanner lock Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items Remove the tape holding the machine tightly Install both the toner cartridges and imaging units Load paper See page 4 7 for Loading paper Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine N e gt Qi A oO N Turn the machine on Setting up the network You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network printer You can set up the basic network settings with the machine s touch screen Note If you want to use the USB cable connect the cable between a computer and you machine Refer to the software installation in Software section 3 1 lt Getting Started gt Supported operating systems The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine tem Requirements Network interface 10 100 Base TX Network operating e Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista 2008 system e Various Linux OS e Mac OS X 10 3 10 5 e TCP IP on windows e DHCP e BOOTP Network protocols Note If you want to set up DHCP network protocol go to http developer apple com networking bonjour download select the Bonjour program that is appropriate for your computer operating system and install the program This program will allow you to set network parameters automatically Follow the instructions in the inst
66. report 11 1 quality 7 9 9 4 resolution 7 8 9 3 sending it via email 7 4 sending it via FTP 7 7 sending it via Network Scan Manager 7 6 sending it via SMB 7 7 solving scanning problems 12 20 USB flash memory 9 2 serial number 11 1 service center registration 10 2 shifting margin 5 8 side cover 1 3 SMB 7 7 sound 10 3 specifications 15 1 16 1 speed dial no 6 7 Stacker 1 2 13 2 stand 1 2 1 3 13 1 staple cartridge ordering 1 2 13 2 replacing 14 2 Start 1 5 Stop 1 5 stored documents 11 2 supplied software 2 1 supplies browsing the supplies life 10 2 checking the supplies life 11 1 expected imaging unit life 10 3 11 5 expected toner cartridge life 10 3 11 3 management 10 3 ordering supplies 13 1 Supplies Management 10 3 SyncThru Web Service 11 9 email address 7 4 fax settings 6 7 SMB FTP setting 7 7 System timeout 3 6 T telephone 6 4 terminal ID 10 4 TIFF 7 9 9 5 toner cartridge 1 3 toner reorder notification 11 2 touch screen problem solving 12 15 tray adjusting the width and length 4 7 optional tray 1 3 tray1 1 3 troubleshooting 12 1 U USB port 1 4 USB flash memory printing 9 5 scanning 9 2 W waste toner container replace 11 7 Windows problems 12 22 requirements 2 2 Samsung Printer Software section SOFTWARE SECTION CONTENTS Chapter 1 INSTALLING PRINTER SOFTWARE IN WINDOWS Installing Printer Software Unawa anG WAE PAENG PNG NA NG DA KNYA POK ANG KG PAGE PENA DEE DA
67. s MAC address print the machine s network information report See page 11 1 for Printing a machine report 4 Click OK to confirm the settings 5 Click Exit to close the SetIP program lt Getting Started gt Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print Before you set the altitude value find the altitude where you are using the machine 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 5 4 Press the General tab 5 Press Altitude Adjustment 6 Select appropriate option and then click OK Note Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine Click Machine Settings gt Setup or Machine Setup gt Altitude Adj Select the appropriate altitude value and then click Apply Machine s basic settings After installation is complete you may want to set the machine s default settings Check the next explanation if you would like to set or change values Setting the authentication password To set your machine up or change the settings you have to login To change password follow the next steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the cont
68. settings made from the printer driver override the Custom in the Paper tab in the printer propeties See Software section settings on the control panel 6 After printing fold the multi purpose tray extension and close the multi purpose tray 49 lt Loading originals and print media 5 Copying This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy machine This chapter includes e Understanding the Copy screen e Copying originals e Changing the settings for each copy e Using special copy features Understanding the Copy screen When you press Copy on the Main screen the Ready To Copy screen appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options All the options are grouped by features so that you can configure your selections easily If the screen displays an other menu press kate to go to the Main screen Basic tab E C E T w i ess Uncnlatod poe e Original Size Selects the size of the originals Page 5 2 e Reduce Enlarge Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image Page 5 3 e Duplex Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper Page 5 3 e Output Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options If you install the optional stacker amp stapler then the staple related option appears Page 5 4 e Text Text Photo Photo Magazine Improves the copy quality by selecting the document type for the current copy job Page 5 4 e Color B W
69. tab Page 10 2 Device Info Date amp Time Default Settings Measurement Timers Language Power Saver Tray Management Altitude Adjustment Output Options Contention Management Sound Supplies Management Machine Test On Demand Overwrite HDD Spoolling Stored Job File Policy Country Usage Page Report When the display Are you sure you want to print it shows press Yes Job Status button This menu shows the job in process in waiting in completed and the Setup tab Page 10 4 Copy Setup Fax Setup Network Setup Authentication Optional Service Color Print Report tab Page 10 9 Print Accounting Reports Report notice message such as an error Page 1 6 Current Job tab Detail Delete Delete All Close Completed Job tab Detail Close Active Notice tab Detail Close lt Introduction gt 2 Software overview This chapter gives you an overview of the software that comes with your machine Further details how to use the software are explained in the Software section This chapter includes e Supplied software e Printer driver features e System requirements Supplied software You must install the printer and scanner software using the supplied CD after you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer This CD provides you with the following software Printer Windows Printer driver Use this driver to software CD take full advantage of your
70. the instruction on display to finish the ID copy for four images 3 Press the Setup tab gt Copy Setup gt Mamual ID Copy Setup 4 Press the number from the template list table 5 Press Edit Template 2 up or 4 up copying N up 6 Selec the appropriate option values and press OK The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 e Template Name Enter the template name pages onto one sheet of paper e Scan Position Select the position for scanning You should select SS the largest scanning position out of the originals Bi Jiii LEFT TOP X 000mm Y 000mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 110mm Y 090mm H l Mt m a 2 Up copying a 4 up copying Load the originals face up in the DADF Page 4 1 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt N Up Select Off 2Up or 4Up e Off Copies an original onto one sheet of paper e 2Up Copies two separate originals onto one page e 4Up Copies four separate originals onto one page ah ON 6 Press Start on the control panel 55 lt Copying gt Note You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce Enlarge for the N Up feature Poster copying Your original will be divided into 9 portions You can paste the printed pages together to make one poster sized document This copy feature is available only when you place originals on t
71. the PCL printer driver Download as Bitmap When this option is selected the driver will download the font data as bitmap images Documents with complicated fonts such as Korean or Chinese or various other fonts will print faster in this setting Print as Graphics When this option is selected the driver will download any fonts as graphics When printing documents with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts printing performance speed may be enhanced in this Setting Print All Text To Black When the Print All Text To Black option is checked all text in your document prints solid black regardless of the color it appears on the screen Print All Text To Darken When the Print All Text To Darken option is checked all text in your document is allowed to print darker than on a normal document Some printers do not support this feature Extras Tab You can select output options for your document See Printing a Document on page 14 for more information about accessing the printer properties Click the Extras tab to access the following feature amp Printing Preferences Layout Paper Graphic Extras About Watermark MNowaema DETE S Overlay No Overlay v Edit Output Options v L Print Subset Normal 1 2 3 etter 8 50 x 11 00 in O mm inch Copies 1 Quality Normal Favorites More Options Job Setting Printer Default v ELECTRONICS Watermark You can create a
72. when your machine is connected to a network e The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating system If you are using Macintosh or Linux See Software section e If you are in a non static IP address environment and need to setup a DHCP network protocol go to the http developer apple com networking bonjour download select the program Bonjour for Windows due to your computer operating system and install the program This program will allow you to fix the network parameter automatically Follow the instruction in the installation window This Bonjour program does not support Linux Installing the program 1 Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine When the driver CD runs automatically close the window 2 Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive X represents your CD ROM drive Double click Application gt SetIP 3 4 Open the folder of the language you plan to use 5 Double click Setup exe to install this program 6 Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation Starting the program 1 From the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Samsung Network Printer Utilities gt SetIP 2 Select the name of your printer and click gs Note If you cannot find your printer name click to refresh the list 3 Enter the network interface s MAC address IP address subnet mask default gateway and then click Apply Note If you do not know the network interface
73. width guide as shown move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the paper the guide may bend the paper Note e Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp e If you do not adjust the paper width guides it may cause paper jams 4 6 lt Loading originals and print media gt Loading paper Loading paper in tray 1 optional tray or optional high capacity feeder Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1 The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 520 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond plain paper You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to load an additional 520 sheets of paper Page 13 1 1 To load paper pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the side you want to print facing up Note Place the side to be printed facing up 2 After inserting paper into the tray while pinching the paper width guide as shown move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the paper the guide may bend the paper Can Note Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp If you do not adjust the paper width guides it may cause paper jams 3 After loading paper set the pap
74. you wan to uninstall the driver follow the installation instruction above but type root localhost Linux uninstall sh on the terminal screen Using Your Printer in Linux 35 Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver l When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password NOTE You must log in as a super user root to uninstall the printer software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 2 Insert the printer software CD ROM The CD ROM will automatically run If the CD ROM does not automatically run click the icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in If the CD ROM is secondary master and the location to mount is mnt cdrom root localhost root mount t iso9660 dev hdc mnt cdrom root localhost root cd mnt cdrom Linux root localhost root uninstall sh NOTE The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package installed and configured 3 Click Uninstall 4 Click Next Uninstallation of Unified Linux Driver You are about ko uninstall the Unified Linux Driver Press Next to proceed with uninstalling the driver Press Cancel to leave the driver intact T HO p e Na Cat Gm 5 Click Finish Ls Printers Configuration button Printers Ciasses Scanners Configuration button for MFP device only Ports C
75. 12 Setting up receiving faxes in color a 6 12 Scanning Understanding the Scan screen cccecccccccccceecesseesseeeeceeceeeesecaaausesceeeeeeeeeseessaeueseeceeeeeeeessseeaasuseseeeceeeeeesessaaaaanesess 7 1 BIG AO Ka AA AA AA 7 1 PROT AICS AA 7 2 PDN UA AA AP 7 2 TR AA AA eats oe AP 7 2 User authentication for network scanning 10111100 nn eeeee 1 3 Registering local authorized users 11 00011 AA 7 3 Register authorized network users cccccccsseseeccceccaueueeeeececaueuseecceeccuaesceeeeeesaauseceeeessaaeaeeeeesesseassaaaeeceeeesaaaeeeeess 7 3 Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email a 7 4 Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment a 7 4 Seng UD aN E MallACCOUNL za GANG AAAA NAA 7 4 Storing email addresses a 7 5 Entering email addresses by the address book 727777 aaaaaa 7 5 Entering email addresses by the keyboard 77777m eneen 7 6 Scanning originals and sending via NetScan a 7 6 Preparation for network 8CaNNING mGA AA 7 6 Scanning and sending via LA AA AA 7 6 Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server TATA 10 Preparation for scanning to SMB FTP U 1 1111 7 7 Scanning and sending to SMB FTP server aaa AA Baa 7 7 Changing the sca
76. 26 Using pa ale a el ago AA AA en eT 26 Chapter 6 SHARING THE PRINTER LOCALLY seting Up a MORONG tn space NAA ANA G 27 Setting Up a Client COmMmPULOI a NANA DENGAN AA AGA 27 Chapter 7 SCANNING Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru Office 220 202 cece eee eee eee teen eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeenganeeegs 28 Using Samsung SmarThru Office cece cece cece eee eens eee tessa eee e sean eee eeaseeeeeeeeeeeeeegenneeeegas 28 Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office 2 30 Using Onscreen ClO FIC anap KANING ANA NAGKAANAK ANA NASAAN 30 Scanning Process with TWAI N enabled Software 220000 3 eee eee sees cesses eeesseeeeeesgeaeeeeugeaueeeesguags 30 Scanning Using the WIA Driver 22220003 ccc cce cece cece eee nent eee eee e ee ee ed ene EEE Ede D ESSE EES SE SEES SS SGEE ESSE SSGEE SEES SEES 30 Ni dele e s GA ANA 30 WINGOWS NISTD mpa NAPANGANGA TOKEN E E AGA AA PAN AP AA NU AG aden 31 Chapter 8 USING SMART PANEL Understanding Smart Panel maa NANANA ANAN ANAN AA AA Opening the Troubleshooting GUME rana DA NAAN Senerenaenees Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings 002220000400000 4 eeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeessaueetensages Chapter 9 USING YOUR PRINTER IN LINUX Chapter 10 EX NN ALO SUGGS AA MAA AA AA AA AA AA Installing the Unified Linux Driver essssssssrssssrrresrrrrsrrrresrrrrrsrrrrerrrrrerrrerrrrrrerrrrernrrrerrrreerrrrene installing the Unified LinuX DAVE BAGA eran enema
77. 3 MFP driver install Linux 34 N n up printing Macintosh 46 Windows 20 O orientation print 39 Windows 15 overlay create 24 delete 24 print 24 P Paper properties set 16 paper size set 16 48 print 39 paper source set 39 Windows 16 paper tray set copy 26 paper type set print 39 poster print 21 PostScript driver installing 25 print document 14 fit to page 22 from Macintosh 44 from Windows 14 N up Macintosh 46 Windows 20 overlay 24 poster 23 PRN 14 scaling 22 watermark 23 print resolution 39 printer driver install Linux 34 printer properties Linux 38 printer properties set Macintosh 44 Windows 15 25 printer resolution set Windows 17 printer software install Macintosh 42 Windows 5 uninstall Macintosh 42 5 Windows 12 printing booklets 21 double sided 22 from Linux 38 R resolution printing 39 S scanning Linux 39 SmarThru 28 TWAIN 30 WIA driver 30 scanning from Macintosh 47 setting darkness 17 favorites 19 image mode 17 resolution Windows 17 true type option 17 software install Macintosh 42 Windows 5 reinstall Windows 11 system requirements Macintosh 42 uninstall Macintosh 42 Windows 12 status monitor use 32 T TWAIN scan 30 U uninstall software Macintosh 42 Windows 12 uninstalling MFP driver Linux 35 W watermark create 23 delete 23 edit 23 print 23 WIA scan 30 49 www samsungprinter com Ver 5 00
78. 5 Accessories Run and type X Setup exe Select Printer Port em Select a port that will be used for your printer Local or TCP IP Port Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window IP Port Name NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing the installer from detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on Update this PC before continuing with the installation Set IP Address lt Back Next gt Cancel e f you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the Installing Printer Software in Windows network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer To verify your printer s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration page in machine e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button NOTE f you cannot find your machine in network please turn off the firewall and click Update For Windows operating system click Start Control Panel and s
79. 5 pin Finisher connection Stacker amp Stapler 5 Extension telephone socket EXT 11 Power switch 6 Telephone line socket LINE 12 Power receptacle 1 4 lt Introduction gt Control panel overview MOOG amp DDO O 2 o Machine Setup Leads you to the machine setup and 8 On Hook Dial Engages the telephone line advanced settings Page 10 1 Job Status Shows the jobs currently running queued jobs 9 Interrupt Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job or completed jobs Status Shows the status of your machine Page 1 7 10 Clear All Reverts the current settings to the default values Display screen Displays the current machine status and 11 Power Saver Sends the machine into the power saver prompts during an operation You can set menus easily mode You can also turn the power on and off with this using the touch screen button Page 3 6 Numeric keypad Dials fax number and enters the number 12 Stop Stops an operation at any time The pop up window value for document copies or other options appears on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or resume Clear Deletes characters in the edit area 13 Start Starts a job Redial Pause In standby mode redials the last number or in edit mode inserts a pause into a fax number Caution When you use the touch screen use your finger only The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or anything else
80. 8 Click Finish Your machine is added to the scanner list of the Network Scan program and you can now scan images through the network Note You can change the scanner properties of your machine and the scan settings from the Samsung Network Scan Manager window Click Properties and set the options in each tab Scanning and sending via NetScan 1 Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to a network and Samsung Network Scan Manager is running on the computer 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can place a single original document face down on the scanner glass 7 6 lt Scanning gt 3 Press Scan from the Main screen Note If the authentication message shows enter User Name and Password This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service Page 11 9 4 Press NetScan 5 When the authentication message pops up enter ID and Password ID and Password that are which you have entered during the configuration of the Network Scan program Page 7 6 When login is completed the screen shows the NetScan server address which is the networked computer Additionally this shows Application list that is configured in Samsung Network Scan Manager 6 Select one from the application list and press Select 7 Press Start on the control panel to start scanning 8 The original will be scanned and sent to your computer Scanning original
81. ANA KA AE AGANG ee AA AA eee 1 8 NO SACLE SOLON AA AA AAP 1 8 2 Software overview UICC SONI AS sa AA AT GAAN AG GA AA AA AN AA AA AA 2 1 Printer driver features u s ANA AA AGANG AA AA 2 2 Vic AA 2 2 3 Getting Started Seting UD the Nakawan saisis o AA AN AA NAA NAA AA 3 1 Seting UD the NEIWOTK maam KAAU AAAA cadadendenas 3 1 Supported operating systems ncacsccescacaneccestcecsatencacecansnetaveccostescestansegacaacaeuaeesanancecannasnencoaoatacasnscnsadieaanenensastaceesuc 3 2 Configuring network protocol via the machine 111111010002 02 Q nnn 3 2 Installing the software 1 111 1 trt tt Ann EE EAEE AEE EEOOAAEEEO AEAEE EnEEEn enn EEoorrnern ereenn 3 2 W0 5 4 ale pidat2 EC 1231 nal 0122 AA EA a ee ene ee eee 3 4 Altitude adjuStMent aNG AA AA GNG AA 3 5 Machine DASIC ElUNGS aaa ALANO ANAN ASANG NANANA 3 5 Setting the authentication password 1 01100100 a 3 5 Seng he ane AMG IMG AA AA AA AA AA a 3 0 Changing the display language 100111111101 A nenene 3 6 Sis Tile elem AA AA AA 3 6 Using power saving feature 1 11170170717027 70 Q trnns trenes nrerrenrennne 3 6 Setting the default tray and paper ee seecccccssseecccceeceecceeeeecceusececsueueeeeceueeeeseuseeesssaacesecsussceeesessssasesessenseeesees 3 6 Changing the default settings 010011111011010 0 ar ttrSnr EEES AEEEEESAEEEESEEEEES EEEE Ennn Erener reen 3 6 Changing the f
82. CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window e If the installation window does not appear click Start gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your e If you use Windows Vista click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Run and type X Setup exe e If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 2 3 appears Click Next drive and click OK 4 Click Next s3 Samsung CLX 8380 Series SAMSUNG Welcome to Samsung CLX 8380 Series Setup This wizard will help install Samsung CLX 8380 Series components It is strongly recommended that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup This printer will automatically substitute fonts shown on your screen with similar looking fonts located in the printer To avoid substitution go to the Extras tab of the printer driver and do not check Use Printer Fonts Select a language from the list below English v 2 00 83 05 Cancel e Select a language from the drop down list if necessary 5 Select Typical installation for a network printer and then click Next 32 Samsung CLX 8380 Series Select Installation Type aru Select type that you want and click Next button Typical installation for a local printer re Typical installation for a network printer C Custom installation
83. Default Press F1 for Help 7 Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections eI mage Quality allows you to select the color composition and the scan resolution for the image Scan Area allows you to select the page size The Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings select from the Job Type drop down list For details about the preset Job Type settings see page 40 You can restore the default setting for the scan options by clicking Default 8 When you have finished click Scan to start scanning The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the progress of the scan To cancel scanning click Cancel 9 The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager aR ita p If you want to edit the scanned image use the toolbar For further details about editing an image see page 40 40 Using Your Printer in Linux 10 when you are finished click Save on the toolbar 11 select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the file name 12 Click Save Adding J ob Type Settings You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later scanning To save a new Job Type setting Change the options from the Scanner Properties window Click Save As Enter the name for your setting Click OK Your setting is added to the Saved Set
84. E OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson th cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of s
85. F file as an image The document has Update your Mac OS to OS 10 3 3 or printed but the print job higher has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS 10 3 2 Some letters are not This problem is caused because Mac displayed normally OS cannot find the font during the cover during the cover page page printing printing Alphanumeric characters in the Billing Info field are only allowed for printing on the cover page Other characters will be broken on the printout When printing a Make sure that the resolution setting in document in Macintosh your printer driver matches the one in with Acrobat Reader 6 0 Acrobat Reader or higher colors print incorrectly 12 25 lt Troubleshooting gt eo Caution a a 1 3 O rde rin su ppl les an d When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies these must P be purchased in the same country where the machine was accessories purchased Otherwise print cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine as configurations of print cartridges This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and and other supplies vary depending on the specific country accessories available for your machine This chapter includes e Supplies Accessories e Accessories l l You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine s e How to purchase performance and capacity Note The following accessories are available fo
86. HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal matrix printer and page printers PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format PostScript PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper envelopes labels and transparencies which can be used on a printer a scanner a fax or a copier PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute PRN file An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system calls which simplifies many tasks Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints PS See PostScript 16 3 lt Glossary gt PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is the network of the world s
87. If you want to view the supply life indicators follow the next step 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Machine Status 3 Scroll down to browse the entire supplies with list view the percentage remaining Finding the serial number If you want to check your serial number from the screen follow the next steps 1 PressMachine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Machine Status gt the Machine Info tab gt Machine Details Sending the imaging unit reorder notification You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is almost over and needs to be reordered 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the General tab gt Supplies Management gt Imaging Unit Reorder Notification 4 Press Imaging Unit Low Alert to enable this option not and press Imaging Unit Low Alert Level to set the remained life level 5 Press OK 11 1 lt Maintenance gt Sending the toner reorder notification You can set the machine to alert you that the toner level is low and needs to be reordered 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the General tab gt Supplies Management gt Toner Cartridge Reorder Notification 4 Press Toner Low Alert to enable this option not and press Toner
88. LSU unit e Remove the sealing tape from the imaging unit Thoroughly roll the toner cartridge five or six times and reinstall it Turn the machine off and turn it on again Open side door and close it If the problem still persists please call for service Delete the received fax data in the memory Call for service to delete fax memory Delete the received fax data in the memory to secure memory Call for service Close the finisher until it locks into place Turn the machine off and reinstall the finisher again Check that the finisher cable is connected properly If the problem persists please call for service Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Install the fuser unit Call for service Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service 12 12 lt Troubleshooting gt Motor does not There is a problem Turn the machine off Paper Jam at the Paper has jammed Clear the jam operate zzz in the control of and turn it on again If top of duplex path during duplex Page 12 9 Please turn off motor unit the problem persists printing then on please call for service Paper Jam in exit Paper has jammed Clear the jam mag area in the fuser area Page 12 9 Original paper The lead edge of the Open the DADF cover does not feed in docimenttailadito and remove jammed
89. Low Alert Level to set the remained life level 5 Press OK Checking Stored Documents The machine shows the document list of the print or fax job Press Stored Documents on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press te to go to the Main screen Wade TITI i BOYU AI 1 Vales TH Re ee BF Valin 1111 Firei Ay ae Vals VIT Hiri P NA T Vaiia TH11 Do AU N3 V2 Paga Tata Delto Al e Public tab Shows the job list of delay print and store print job e Secured tab Shows the job list of secure print secure receive and secure store print job e User Name Shows the user name who registered the job File Name Shows the job name which is registered as the job information For the computer printing the file name shows e Date Shows the date of the job registered e Page Shows the total page number of the job e Detail Pops the separate message showing the basic job information with the file size the paper size and the paper type as well e Edit Lets you to modify the file name e Delete Deletes the selected list e Delete All Deletes the selected all list e Print Prints the selected list Select the number of printout in the popup window Cleaning your machine To maintain print and scan quality follow the cleaning procedures below each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality problems occur Caution tv e Cleaning the machine cabinet with cleanin
90. MSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com it JAMAICA 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com latin JAPAN 0120 327 527 www samsung com jp LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com lv LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com It LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www samsung com lu MALAYSIA 1800 88 9999 www samsung com my MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com mx 7864 NETHERLAND 0900 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com nl S 0 10 min NEW 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 www samsung com nz ZEALAND 786 NICARAGUA 00 1800 5077267 www samsung com latin NORWAY 815 56 480 www samsung com no PANAMA 800 7267 www samsung com latin PHILIPPINES 1800 10 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com ph 7864 POLAND 0 801 801 881 www samsung com pl 022 607 93 33 PORTUGAL 80820 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com pt 7864 PUERTO RICO 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com latin REP 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com DOMINICA latin EIRE 0818 717 100 www samsung com ie RUSSIA 8 800 555 55 55 www samsung ru SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com sg 7864 SLOVAKIA 0800 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com sk 7864 SOUTH 0860 SAMSUNG 724 www samsung com za AFRICA 7864 COUNTRY CUSTOMER CARE CENTER WEB SITE SPAIN 902 1 SAMSU 72678 www samsung com es SWEDEN 0771 400 200 www samsung com se SWITZERLAN 0800 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com ch D 7864 TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 TAIWAN 0800 329 999 www samsung com tw THAILAND 1800 29 3232 ww
91. NOTE e Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide e If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM Setting Up a Client Computer 1 Right click the Windows Start button and select Explore 2 Select My Network Places and then right click Search for Computers 3 Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name field and click Search In case host computer requires User name and Password fill in User ID and password of host computer account Double click Printers and Faxes Right click printer driver icon select Connect Click Yes if the installation confirm message appears oul amp 27 Sharing the Printer Locally Scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files on your computer Then you can fax or e mail the files display them on your web site or use them to create projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software or the WIA driver This chapter includes e Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru Office e Scanning Process with TWAIN enabled Software e Scanning Using the WIA Driver NOTE e Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide e You can check your printer name i
92. OUNTRY CUSTOMER CARE CENTER WEB SITE ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ar AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com au AUSTRIA 0800 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com at 7864 BELGIUM 02 201 2418 www samsung com be BRAZIL 0800 124 421 www samsung com br 4004 0000 CANADA 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com ca 7864 CHILE 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com cl CHINA 800 810 5858 www samsung com cn 400 810 5858 010 6475 1880 COLOMBIA 01 8000112112 www samsung com co COSTA RICA 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com latin CZECH 800 726 786 800 www samsung com cz REPUBLIC SAMSUNG Samsung Zrt esk organiza n slo ka Oasis Florenc Sokolovsk 394 17 180 00 Praha 8 DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www samsung com dk ECUADOR 1 800 10 7267 www samsung com latin EL 800 6225 www samsung com SALVADOR latin ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung ee KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz ru KYRGYZSTAN 00 800 500 55 500 FINLAND 030 6227 515 www samsung com fi FRANCE 3260 SAMSUNG www samsung com fr 08 25 08 65 65 0 15 min GERMANY 01805 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung de 7864 0 14 min GUATEMALA 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com latin HONDURAS 800 7919267 www samsung com latin HONG KONG 3698 4698 www samsung com hk HUNGARY 06 80 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com hu 7864 COUNTRY CUSTOMER CARE CENTER WEB SITE INDIA 3030 8282 www samsung com in 1800 110011 1 800 3000 8282 INDONESIA 0800 112 8888 www samsung com id ITALIA 800 SA
93. Paper jamin front Paperjammedinthe Open the stacker scanner actuate the scan original Page 12 1 of finisher stacker door and remove sensor within the jammed paper by correct time after lowering guide 1a or actuating the 1b Pe oor Seine Paper Jam in MP Paper misfed from Clear the jam NAA a nadl is Oversized document Open the DADF cover tray multi purpose tray Page 12 7 too long for j Check OP SOUDE teeding Oh an Pani me Paper Jam intray 1 Paper has jammed Clear the jam ee re engine s jammed ongina in the feeding area Page 12 3 and size j age tes of the tray page 12 5 Check the document size whether it is Paper Jam in tray 2 Paper has jammed Clear the jam supported in the feeding area Page 12 3 and Original paper jam in front of scanner Original paper jam in front of scanner duplex path Original paper jam The originals are jammed in DADF Paper has jammed printing in the DADF The lead edge of the Page 15 1 Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original Page 12 1 Clear the jam Page 12 2 Open the DADF cover Paper Jam in tray 2 HCF Paper Jam in tray 3 Paper jam inside finisher of the tray Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray Paper jammed in the stacker page 12 5 Clear the jam Page 12 3 and page 12 5 Clear the jam Page 12 3 and page 12 5 Open the stacker door and remo
94. SB memory This may damage your machine e If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings and password settings your machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see the device s User s Guide Scanning to an USB memory device You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory device When you scan a document the machine uses the default settings such as the resolution You can also customize your own scan setting Page 9 3 Scanning 1 Insert an USB memory device into the USB memory port on the rear side of your machine 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 Press USB from the Main screen Press the Scan to USB Select the appropriate option Page 9 3 Press OK Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning oOo N O OA A OQO After scanning is complete you can remove the USB memory device from the machine Scan to USB Basic tab f a Hague hing cher ba Pas wat Basic Lettie e Name The folder names on the USB memory device e Date Tha date which folders are made e Select Selects the folder which has been chosen from the Name e New Folder Makes a new folder on the USB memory device e Detail Views the details of currently selected folder or file e Rename Renames the folder or file name e Delete Deletes the folder on the U
95. SB memory device e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value e File Name Names a file before you scan a document by just clicking this field e Back Returns to the previous screen Advanced tab 8a e Original Size Sets the originals to a specific fixed size Page 9 3 Back Returns to the previous screen 9 2 lt Using USB flash memory gt Image tab Darkness Noi Fre Background DH Scan lo lda of ea e Original Type Selects whether the original is text text photo or photo Page 9 4 e Color Mode Selects the color options of the scan output If the original is color and you want to scan in color press Color Mode Page 9 4 e Darkness Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output Use left right arrow to adjust the values Page 9 4 e Erase Background Erases backgrounds like paper patterns Page 9 4 e Scan to Edge Scans originals from edge to edge Page 9 4 e Back Returns to the previous screen Output tab gnas e Quality Adjusts the scan quality of the scan output Page 9 4 e Scan Preset Automatically changes some scan options such as file format resolution and more You can adjust options to fit each specific purpos
96. SE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence ELECTRONICS Declaration of Conformity Manufactured at of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd 259 Gongdan Dong Gumi City Gyeongsangbuk Do 730 030 Korea Factory name address We hereby declare that the product above is in compliance with the essential requirements of the R amp TTE Directive 1995 5 EC by application of EN 60950 1 2001 A11 EN 55022 1998 A1 2000 A2 2003 EN 55024 1998 A1 2001 A2 2003 EN 61000 3 2 2000 A2 2005 EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 2001 ETSI EG201 121 February 2000 ETSI TS 103 021 ES 201 187 The Technical documentation is kept at the below Manufacturer s address Manufacturer Samsung Electronics Co Ltd 259 Gongdan Dong Gumi City yE PY Gyungbuk Korea 730 030 December 17 2007 Whan Soon Yim S Manager Representative in the EU Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab Blackbushe Business Park s2 JOVE Za Saxony Way Yateley Hampshire 5 GU46 6GG UK Yong Sang Park S Manager December 17 2007 Place and date of issue Name and signature of authorized person vi 1 Introd
97. XP 1 OG A W Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass From the Start menu on your desktop window select Settings Control Panel and then Scanners and Cameras Double click your scanner driver icon The Scanner and Camera Wizard launches Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see how your preferences affect the picture Click Next Enter a picture name and select a file format and destination to save the picture Follow the on screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer Windows Vista 1 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass 2 Click Start gt Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Scanners and Cameras 3 Click on Scan a document or picture Then Windows Fax and Scan application is opened automatically NOTE e To view scanners user can click on View scanners and cameras e If there is not Scan a document or picture open the MS paint program and click From Scanner or Camera on File menu 4 Click New Scan and then scan driver is opened 5 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture 6 Click Scan NOTE If you want to cancel the scan job press the Cancel button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard 31 Scanning 8 Using Smart Panel Smart Panel is a
98. Your Printer with a Macintosh For MAC OS X 10 5 Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your machine in Bonjour Devices If you want to scan using TWAIN refer to the MAC OS X 10 4 procedure above Set the scan options on this program Scan and save your scanned image NOTE you want to scan via the DADF use TWAIN comliant softwares e For more information about using Image Capture please refer to the Image Capture s help e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant softwares such as Adobe Photoshop e Scan process differ according to TWAI N compliant softwares Please refer to the user s guide of the software scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Image Capture operates propery in Mac OS 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS 10 4 7 or higher SOFTWARE SECTION NDEX A advanced printing use 20 B booklet printing 21 C canceling scan 31 Color 17 D document print Macintosh 44 Windows 14 double sided printing 22 Extras properties set 18 F favorites settings use 19 G Graphics 17 Graphics properties set 17 H help use 19 25 install printer driver Macintosh 42 Windows 5 installing Linux software 34 L Layout properties set Windows 15 Linux driver install 34 printer properties 38 printing 38 scanning 39 M Macintosh driver install 42 uninstall 42 printing 44 scanning 47 setting up the printer 4
99. a size and job complexity b Please visit www samsungprinter com to download the latest software version 15 2 lt Specifications gt Scanner specifications TWAIN standard WIA standard DADF and Flat bed Color CCD Charge Coupled Device module Compatibility Scanning method Resolution TWAIN Up to 600 x 600 dpi Up to 4 800 x 4 800 dpi by software standard enhancement WIA standard Up to 600 x 600 dpi Scan to USB 100 200 300 dpi NetScan Scan to Email 100 200 300 400 600 dpi Scan to Server Network Scan File format PDF TIFF JPEG e Scanner glass 348 mm 13 7 inches e DADF 348 mm 13 7 inches Effective scanning width Max 208 mm 8 2 inches Color bit depth e Internal 36 bits e External 24 bits Mono bit depth e 1 bit for Linearity amp Halftone e 8 bits External 12 bits Internal for Gray scale Grayscale Effective scanning length 256 levels a ri to the applications for scanning the maximum resolution might iffer ae is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color Facsimile specifications optional EE Compatibility ITU T G3 Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN or behind PABX Applicable line Data coding MH MR MMR JBIG JPEG Tx only 33 6 Kbps Approx 3 seconds page e Scanner glass 356 mm 14 inches DADF 356 mm 14 inches Modem speed Transmission speed Maximum document length Black amp White
100. a Document You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window 1 2 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop Click the Ss button to switch to Scanners Configuration Select the scanner on the list Unified Driver Configurator m Scanners configuration About Help O lala Click your scanner Selected scanner Vendor Model Type Exit BELTAOWICS When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to the computer and turned on your scanner appears on the list and is automatically selected If you have two or more scanners attached to your computer you can select any scanner to work at any time For example while acquisition is in progress on the first scanner you may select the second scanner set the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously Click Properties Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF Automatic Document Feeder or face down on the document glass Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Preview Pane z Scanner Properties SH zr Color Composition Color 16 Million Colors e Format Ad 210x297 mm bd Drag the pointer to Document Source auto m set the image area to be scanned Job Type Standard Job IE ls inte ees aang
101. a print queue or print spooler such as the printer group in Windows delete the job as follows 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings and then Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers 3 Double click the Samsung CLX 8380 Series PCL 6 icon Or Samsung CLX 8380 Series PS 4 From the Document menu select Cancel Note You can also access this window by simply double clicking the printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel 8 1 lt Basic printing gt 9 Using USB flash memory This chapter explains how to use an USB memory device with your machine This chapter includes e About USB memory e Understanding the USB screen e Plugging in an USB memory device e Scanning to an USB memory device e Scan to USB e Changing the scan feature settings e Printing from a USB memory device About USB memory USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents presentations downloaded music and videos high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the following on your machine using an USB memory device e Scan documents and save them on an USB memory device e Print data stored on an USB memory devi
102. ab gt Authentication password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Network Setup Athertecition Mate Network Setup Thangs Adre Paseo Aantbreritecateoes Optional Service v ee a TCP IP Protocol Select appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use the network environment Note There are lots of parameters to be set therefore if you are not sure leave as it is or consult the network administrator Ethernet Speed You can select the communication speed for Ethernet connections Clear Setting Reverts the network settings to the default values 10 6 Machine status and advanced setup gt ee Authentication Mode Authentication Mode Continue Network Accounting Foreign Device Interface No Authentication Mode It enables the authentication mode which is set from the Job Account menu in the SyncThru Web Admin Service When you install the optional FDI kit select On to activate it e Job Timer If there is not enough credit you can set the machine to cancel a job right away or wait a designated amount of time for a deposit e Print Job Control When it is enabled the both computer printing and copying are possible since the credit remains With Disable copy printing needs the credit However when printing a report or a fax the credit is not needed Inhibit Services When no credit is left the machine disables the copy job only with
103. adows of a binding or book edge from the center and side edges of the copies This feature only applies when you do copying a book Page 5 6 Note If you have set the Book Copy option to Off you cannot use Book Center and Edge Erase Press OK Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Erasing background images This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the background as in newspapers or catalogs 1 Load the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Press Copy from the Main screen Press the Image tab gt Erase Background e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background is e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the background is Press OK Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Shifting margins You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page y lak T lt 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Or load the originals face up in the DADF Page 4 1 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Press the Image tab gt Margin Shift 4 Select Margin Shift option e Off Disables this feature e Auto Center Automatically centers of the paper copy The original must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature This option supports only the original is loaded on th
104. agged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmapped image format TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images on the printed paper Toner can be melted by the heat of the fuser causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from within the program an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt Additional directory gt URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located USB Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard
105. aked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter DPI Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible detail in the image and a larger file size DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equipped with a Duplex can print double sided of paper Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warranty period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day ECM Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise 16 1 lt Glossary gt Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another An emulator duplicates the functio
106. allation window This program does not support Linux Configuring network protocol via the machine You can setup TCP IP Network parameters please follow the steps listed below 1 Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ 45 Ethernet cable Make sure you turned on the machine Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting a A OQO N When the login message appears enter password Touch the password input area then the question marks appears Use the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password Once the password is entered press OK Factory setting 1111 6 Press the Setup tab gt Network Setup 7 Select TCP IP Protocol 8 Press IP Setting 9 Select Static and then enter IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway address fields Touch the input area then enter addresses by number keypad on the control panel 7 L o Ji cm Note Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure 10 Press OK Note You can also set up the network settings through the network administration programs e SyncThru Web Admin Service Web based printer management solution for network administrators SyncThru Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access Download this program from http solution samsungprinter com S
107. an to Server gt the Image tab gt Darkness Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then press OK Light Dark ea CODD Erase Background You can lighten reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning colored paper or newspaper originals Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Select On and press OK Scan to Edge You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is Usually the machine scans a page except edges which means the margin especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray But if you scan and sent it right away via the network as the file the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Scan to Edge Select On and press OK Quality You can use this option to produce a high quality document Higher quality you select a larger file size you get Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt Quality Best Normal B Draft Note When you set Color Mode to Gray the Quality option is grayed out Scan Preset This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt Scan Preset m Piina OCR High Quality Primar heal Heoi Lami e Sharing and Printing Produces a small size
108. ank or printed divider between transparencies within a set Page 5 7 Image tab e Erase Edge Allows you to erase punch holes staple marks and fold creases along any of the four documents edges Page 5 7 e Erase Background Prints an image with no background Page 5 8 e Margin Shift Creates a binding edge for the document Page 5 8 e Scan Enhance Use this feature for the better quality of copy output Page 5 8 5 1 lt Copying gt Copying originals This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals 1 Press Copy from the Main screen 2 Place originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more Page 5 2 Page 5 3 i ve Letter i Latter D 1 Loner 4 Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen Paper Supply T Letter B Letter A Letter 2 5 Enter the number of copies using the number keypad if necessary 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Note To cancel the current copy job press Stop on the control panel Or you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status on the control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete Changing the settings for each copy On the Basic tab of the Copy screen you can select copy fea
109. aper source size and type 5 Click OK and print the document You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together D NG 0 15 inches 21 Advanced Printing Printing Booklets This printer feature allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet 1 To change the print settings from your software application access the printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 From the Layout tab choose Booklet Printing from the Type drop down list NOTE The booklet printing option is available when Letter A4 Legal Folio Oficio JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 or Statement size is selected in the Size option on the Paper tab 3 4 Click the Paper tab and select the paper source size and type Click OK and print the document After printing fold and staple the pages Printing on Both Sides of Paper You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper Before printing decide how you want your document oriented The options are e Printer Setting if you select this option this feature is determined by the setting you ve made on the control panel of the printer If this option does not appear your printer does not have this feature e None e Long Edge which is the conventional layout used in
110. ars altitude of 1 000 m 3 281ft or above The replacing Remove the imaging unit and on the next few high altitude may affect the print quality from install a new one Page 11 4 sheets or loose loose toner or light imaging You can set this toner light print or option through Printer Settings Utility or the contamination Printer Tab in printer driver s properties See occurs page 3 5 e The machine may require repair Contact a service representative 12 19 lt Troubleshooting gt Copying problems Suggested solutions Copies are too light Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or or too dark lighten the backgrounds of copies Smears lines e Ifthe defects are on the original press Light marks or spots and Dark arrows to lighten the background appears on copies of your copies e If there are no defects on the original clean the scan unit Page 11 2 Copy image is skewed e Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF e Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly Blank copies print Ensure that the original is face down on the out scanner glass or face up in the DADF e Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package e In high humidity areas do not leave paper in Image rubs off the copy easily the machine for extended periods of time Fan the stack of paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh sup
111. as the same name when you entered a new file name the file will be saved as a different name that is automatically programmed e Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job information on USB as you store new job information Printing from a USB memory device You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device You can print TIFF BMP JPEG PDF and PRN files Direct Print option supported file types e PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible e PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document The document will be saved as a PRN file rather than printed on paper Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from USB memory See Software section to learn how to create a PRN file e BMP BMP Uncompressed TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline e JPEG JPEG Baseline PDF PDF 1 4 and below To print a document from a USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory porton the rear side of your machine Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it 2 Press USB from the Main screen 3 Use up down arrows until the file you want appears Select the file name If there is a folder select folder name and press Select 4 Press USB Print 5 Press Start on the control panel to begin printing lt Using USB flash memory gt 1 0 Machine status and advanced s
112. ax Setting gt Receive Forward 6 Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel e If you want to set the start time and end time select Start Time and End Time e If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax set the Forward amp Print 7 Press OK Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email Note If Forward to Server Setting is on this option will be grayed out 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Email Setting gt Send Forward 6 Press On 7 Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on the display 8 Press OK Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email Note If Forward to Server Setting is on this option will be grayed out 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 6 11 lt Faxing Optional gt 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Email Setting gt Receive Forward 6 Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on the display If you want the
113. background text image to be printed on each page of your document For details see Using Watermarks on page 23 Overlay Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and letterhead paper For details see Using Overlays on page 24 Output Options e Print Subset You can set the sequence in which the pages print Select the print order from the drop down list Normal 1 2 3 Your printer prints all pages from the first page to the last page Reverse All Pages 3 2 1 Your printer prints all pages from the last page to the first page Print Odd Pages Your printer prints only the odd numbered pages of the document Print Even Pages Your printer prints only the even numbered pages of the document Staple Do the stapling on the printouts e Request Offset If you expect printout sets out of the originals the machine places printout sets slightly offset from one another More Options e Information Page Select Information Page to print a cover sheet containing the printer name the network user ID job name before printing the document When several users send a print job to the printer this option allows you to easily find your printing from the output tray Basic Printing 18 e Use Printer Fonts When Use Printer Fonts is checked the printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory resident fonts to print your document rather than downloading the fonts used in your document Because
114. book binding e Short Edge which is the type often used with calendars ool TTT kad a WT TT TMT TTT gt Il A Short Edge e Reverse Duplex Printing allows you to select general print order compare to duplex print order If this option does not appear your printer does not have this feature NOTE e Do not print on both sides of labels transparencies envelopes or thick paper Paper jamming and damage to the printer may result e To use double sided printing you can use only the following paper sizes Letter A4 Legal Folio Oficio JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 and Statement with a weight of 20 24 Ibs 75 90 g m7 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties Printing a Document on page 14 2 From the Layout tab select the paper orientation 3 From the Double sided Printing section select the binding option you want 4 Click the Paper tab and select the paper source size and type 5 Click OK and print the document NOTE If your printer does not have a duplex unit you should complete the printing job manually The printer prints every other page of the document first After printing the first side of your job the Printing Tip window appears Follow the on screen instructions to complete the printing job Advanced Printing 22 Printing a Reduced or
115. box No and Passcode and then press OK When the confirmation window appears press Yes to complete the job e Printing a Mailbox Press Fax gt the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Print enter Mailbox No and Passcode and press OK Faxing to a remote Mailbox To fax and store the originals in a recipient s Mailbox in this machine you can use the Send to Remote feature 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 3 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Send to Remote 5 Enter Remote Fax No Mailbox No and Passcode All these field are filled with information from the receiver 9 Ready to F ax NG Group Nama cannot be emoty 6 Press OK Printing a report after sending a fax You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is successfully completed or not Note The detailed information is available in advanced setup part Page 10 9 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Print Report tab gt Report gt Fax Report gt Fax Send Report 4 Press On 7 Penn Sen bire ne Pde Dory eh ba onload 5 Press OK Sending a fax in toll save time You can set the machine to send a fax in t
116. bs from the list e Close Closes the job status window and switches to previous view Power Saver button When the machine is not in use save electricity with the provided power save mode Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode Page 3 6 If you press Power Saver button for more than two seconds a window appears requesting that you turn the power off If you choose Yes the power is turned off This button can also be used to turn the button on O e The machine is not in the power save mode e The machine is in the low power save mode Blue The machine is in the power save mode The machine is in the ready power save mode Interrupt button When you press Interrupt button the machine goes into interrupt mode which means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job When the urgent copy job completes the previous printing job continues O AA The machine is not in interrupt printing mode The machine is in interrupt printing mode 1 6 lt Introduction gt Note Interrupt mode is resumed at default value Off after the machine is shut down or reset Menu map The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions These menus can be accessed by pressing Machine Setup Job Status or touching menus on the Understanding the Status LED display screen Refer to the following diagram When the problem occurs the Status LED indi
117. by the operating instructions Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation 15 Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning If possible unplug the AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm 16 The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with 110 V machine then it should be 16 AWG or bigger 17 Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord 18 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Laser Safety Statement The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition WARNING Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser Scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes When using this product these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of f
118. cates the machine s condition by the light color of it s action Main screen The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel Status Some menus are grayed out depending on your model Off e The machine is off line Basic tab Page 5 1 Basic tab Page 6 1 e The machine is in power save mode When Original Size Address Reduce Enlarge Duplex data is received or any button is pressed it Duplex Resolution switches to on line automatically Output Advanced tab Page 6 2 Original Type Original Size Green pon The machine is on line and can be used cher NONE Prionty Send Paper Supply Polling Blinking When the backlight slowly blinks the machine Advanced tab Page 5 1 Mailbox is receiving data from the computer ID Copy Image tab Page 6 2 N Up Original Type When the backlight blinks rapidly the machine Poster Copy Darkness is printing data Clone Copy Erase Background Book Copy Color Mode Scan Scan to Email Page 7 1 Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Output tab Page 7 2 NetScan Print Blinking A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting the error to be cleared Check the D display message When the problem is USB cleared the machine resumes to i USB Format The toner cartridge is near the end of its life USB Print Order a new toner cartridge You can Scan to USB temporarily improve print quality by Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Output tab redistributing the toner
119. ce e Format the USB memory device Understanding the USB screen To use the USB memory device press USB on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press fees to go to the Main screen Note When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine USB icon shows on the display screen Press USB Format USB Print or Scan to USB Hequewing oksen kat Picasa vai Files Pa ay AKNG Directory aa ae Sean bo GG Deo oy a OT Me Fe a2 kat aa e USB Format You can delete image files stored on an USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device e USB Print You can directly print files stored on an USB memory device You can print TIFF BMP JPEG PDF and PRN files Page 9 5 e Scan to USB You can specify image size file format or color mode for each scanning to USB job Page 9 2 Plugging in an USB memory device The USB memory port on the side of your machine is designed for USB V1 1 and USB V2 0 memory devices You must use an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type connector Use only a metal shielded N USB memory device 3 Note There are two USB plug types 9 1 lt Using USB flash memory gt Insert an USB memory device into the USB memory port on the side of your machine Cautions KI e Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation or writing to or reading from U
120. ce Enlarge to Original 100 Paper Supply to Tray 5 Press On to activate this feature 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Book copying Use this feature to copy a book If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the scanner lid open 1 Place the originals face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 Note The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Press the Advanced tab gt Book Copy 5 6 lt Copying gt Note To remove shadows of a book edge press the Image tab gt Erase Edge gt Book Center and Edge Erase 4 Select the binding option e Off Disables this feature e Left Page Prints left page of the book e Right Page Prints right page of the book e Both Page Prints both facing pages of the book 5 Press OK 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Booklet copying The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper which are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in the correct sequence The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on the selected paper 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab
121. ch Root Directory the top search level of the LDAP directory tree Select Authentication method Two options for LDAP server login Anonymous This is used to bind with null password and login ID Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS Simple This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN for adding Base DN to login name Select Match User s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute options are CN UID or UserPrincipalName Enter your login name password maximum number of search results and search timeout 7 3 lt Scanning gt Note LDAP Referral LDAP client will search referral server if the LDAP server has no data to reply to query and if the LDAP server has a referral server 11 Select Serach Name Order that you desire 12 Check the box next to From Field Security Options Note This option is only provided if you have selected the Network authentication option in the user authentication setting You may check this option if you want to search for information in a default email address group 13 Click Apply Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several destinations from the machine by email Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass for
122. ch you entered in SyncThru Web Service Page 7 7 e Server Alias name which you entered in SyncThru Web Service Page 7 7 e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value e Back Returns to the previous screen Advanced tab i 7 Ready to Scan NI Ome Mailbox Entry should be selected Hack e Original Size Sets the originals to a specific fixed size Page 7 8 e Back Returns to the previous screen Image tab a Pex to Scan Ta Dna Mlle Entry thodi ba palactod Sabra Bak e Original Type Selects whether the original is text or photo Page 7 8 e Color Mode Adjusts the color options of the scan output If the original is color and you want to scan in color press Color Mode Page 7 8 e Darkness Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output Use left right arrow to adjust the values Page 7 9 e Erase Background Erases backgrounds like paper patterns Page 7 9 e Scan to Edge Scans originals from edge to edge Page 7 9 e Back Returns to the previous screen Output tab ba e Quality Adjusts the display quality of the scan output Page 7 9 e File Format Selects the file format of the scan output Page 7 9 e Scan Preset Automatically changes some scan options such as
123. chine cece cccceecceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeee esse eeseeeeseeeseeeesaeeeseeeseeeeseeeessaeeseeeeseneeseeeees 12 8 ASAR AA AA AA aeiees canna eon ane 12 9 In the duplex unit area eee 12 9 Mihe stacker MIMI GING saa AA AA AA UA AA AA AA 12 10 Understanding display messages aa naaa GA AB ANNE NG 12 11 SOV Medy 2 ee O AA 12 15 TOuUCh Soroen PRODI INN testers acta AA AA 12 15 Paper feeding problems AA nenni 12 15 aaa eelle NING r AABANGAN AA E E 12 15 Printing quality problems ccrcinacnmusitiionmnsiearcaioe TANPA PALANGGANA NA NAN GANANG ENNA 12 17 ela ae AA PA eee 12 20 ale lag TODIOTIS AA 12 20 Network Scan problems 24 4 NANANG NGPALIT ANA NA reenn 12 21 Fax problems OOMOMAL AA AA AA 12 21 Common Windows problems 1 111110 1Ha 12 22 Common PostScript problems 1111 21212 0 0 Aa 12 22 Common LINUX ProDIEMS AA AA 12 23 Common Macintosh problems maa Nha AGA AA 12 25 13 14 Ordering supplies and accessories silo 13 1 PCOS SO cat AA se se ewe Sc sc ata ca woe eae ieee eae i ese cesses wa ere es Se eee ke eee 13 1 How to purchase Uu a 13 2 Installing accessories Precautions to take when installing accessories saling a memory MANG nA ANAN BANG les atesaindeedinuctaniesiacenheaiasneeebsncatenetadiaeiewtatedssanbewiaasane 14 1 Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties 0 0 cece cecccceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeas 14 2 Replacing the Stapler
124. ck side of a paper For instance if you print 6 sheet of original papers every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a paper and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a paper The information on the back side of the print out is rotated 180 degree f 1 G 5 3 lt Copying gt e Reverse 2 gt 2 Sided Scans the both sides of originals and prints Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type them on both sides of a paper But the machine reverses the print Text Text Photo Photo out order of the originals The machine prints the back sides of ES Ey originals first which means the front sides of originals is printed on Magazine the back side of a paper egy e Text Use for originals containing mostly text bi e Text Photo Use for originals with mixed text and photographs 2 1 e Photo Use when originals are photographs bo e Magazine Use when originals are magazines Deciding the form of copy output Collated Staple Press the Basic tab gt Output then use left right arrows to select Collated or Changing the darkness api hile ane Se O eee BANAS On erie iene This defines the degree of darkness Use left right arrows to change the Note level of light dark in the printouts If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides of original the message Another Page appears after the RE A D
125. creen Set Enable to activate the scanning and sending it via network Scan to SMB Enables or disables the Scan to SMB option from the scan screen Scan to FTP Enables or disables the Scan to FTP option from the scan screen On Demand Image Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information Set this option to Enable go to the General tab gt On Demand Overwrite press Start in the display to start the overwriting job Immediate Image Overwrite If you select Enable the machine renews the HDD memory when you save new job on it 10 7 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt Adjusting the color contrast This menu allows you to adjust the color setting 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Color Print Fapa Bak Description Custom Color This item allows you to adjust contrast color by color CMYK Allows you to adjust the contrast of the toner in each toner cartridge e Default Optimizes colors automatically e Manual Adjust Allows you to manually adjust the color contrast for each cartridge Note You should use the Default setting for best color quality Pe eee Auto Color The machine virtually prints certain patterned image Registration to calibrate the color printing position This fea
126. d press the right arrow to make the output darker Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Darkness Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then press OK Light Dark eal CORD Erase Background You can lighten reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning colored paper or newspaper originals Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Select On and press OK Scan to Edge You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is Usually the machine scans a page except edges which means the margin especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray But if you scan and sent it right away via the network as the file the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Scan to Edge Select On and press OK Quality You can use this option to produce a high quality document Higher quality you select a larger file size you get Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt Quality WE Normal go Draft Scan Preset This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt Scan Preset Piina mo OCR High Quality Primara Aphia Heri Lami e Sharing and Printing Produces a small sized file for normal quality documents e High Quality Printing Set this option for high quality output
127. d bo sakal call Press a b c d e f g Press Press a b c a Fk WwW N Press and press c O m Note To enter contents in other fields press 1 fun j keyboard Ng Ng on the 6 Press OK after finishing all the contents Scanning originals and sending via NetScan You can scan an image on the machine via the Network Scan program which is installed in your networked computer Preparation for network scanning Make sure the printer software is installed on your computer using the Printer Software CD ROM since the printer software and should include the Network Scan program See page 3 2 for detailed information on installation steps 1 In Windows select Start gt Programs gt Samsung Network Printer Utilities gt Network Scan gt Network Scan The Samsung Network Scan Manager window opens 2 Click the Add Device button 3 Click Next 4 Select Connect to this scanner and enter the IP address of your machine Or select Browse for a scanner recommended to show a list of scanners on your network 5 Click Next 6 Select your machine from the list and enter a name user ID and PIN Personal Identification Number for the machine Note e The model name of your machine is automatically entered as the scanner name but it can be changed upon your need e The ID can be entered up to 8 characters The first character must be a letter e The PIN must be of 4 digits 7 Click Next
128. d file for normal quality documents e High Quality Printing Set this option for high quality output with the largest file size e Archival Record For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size of the output e OCR Produces scanned output for OCR software You can expect the highest quality images e Simple Scan Used for a simple document with text only The file size of output is small e Custom Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen File Format You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt File Format p PDF JPEG Single Page TIFF Muhi Page TIFF PDF Scans originals in PDF format e Single Page TIFF Scans the originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format and several originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file e Multi Page TIFF Scans originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format but several originals are scanned as one file e JPEG Scans original in JPEG format lt Scanning gt S Basic printing This chapter explains common printing tasks Printing a document Your machine allows you to print from various Windows Macintosh or Linux applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use For details about printing see Software section Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in
129. d message appears disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it If the problem persists please refer to the Image Capture s help 4 5 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other Place a single document face down on the document glass OR load the document s face up into the ADF or DADF Start Applications and click Image Capture Set the scan options on this program Scan and save your scanned image NOTE For more information about using Image Capture please refer to the Image Capture s help If you want to scan via the DADF use TWAIN comliant softwares You can also scan using TWAI N compliant softwares such as Adobe Photoshop Scan process differ according to TWAI N compliant softwares Please refer to the user s guide of the software If scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Image Capture operates propery in Mac OS 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS 10 4 7 or higher Scanning with network 1 2 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on Place a single document face down on the document glass OR load the document s face up into the ADF or DADF Start Applications and click Image Capture Click Devices and click Browse Devices For MAC OS X 10 4 Select your machine in Twain devices option Make sure that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked and click Connect 6 7 e If e If 47 Using
130. ddress for the printer To verify your printer s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration page in machine e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button NOTE If you cannot find your machine in network please turn off the firewall and click Update For Windows operating system click Start Control Panel and start windows firewall and set this option unactivated For other operating system refer to its on line guide Installing Printer Software in Windows 6 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you so desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish 3 Click Next It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Select a language from the list below English v NG Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership Cancel eseneesececesvoseceseseesecescsecueccecteeesesensecrse T I dlike to print a test page e If necessary se
131. direction in which information is printed on a page e Portrait prints across the width of the page letter style e Landscape prints across the length of the page spreadsheet style e Rotate allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees f A Landscape O e pmi z as ct Layout Options Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options You can choose Multiple Pages per Side and Poster Printing e For details see Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing on page 20 e For details see Printing Posters on page 21 e For details see Printing Booklets on page 21 Double sided Printing Double sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of paper If this option does not appear your printer does not have this feature e For details see Printing on Both Sides of Paper on page 22 Paper Tab Use the following options to set the basic paper handling Specifications when you access the printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 for more information on accessing printer properties Click the Paper tab to access various paper properties Printing Preferences A Layout Paper Graphic Extras About Copies 1 999 a Paper Options Size Letter Na Custom Source Auto Selection v Type Printer Default v Letter Scaling Printing 8 50 x 11 00 in Printing Type None v O mm inch Copies 1 Quality N
132. driver By clicking Options you can set the default device options Jobs shows the list of print jobs Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list Classes shows the class that your printer is in Click Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the selected class 4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties Window Help OK Cancel 4 Change the printer and print job properties General Text Graphics Device r Paper Options Paper Size Ad x Paper Type Printer Default Paper Orientation Portrait C Landscape Banners m Pages per Side N Up Start None Normal 1 Up lJ End None 7 C 2 Up C 4 Up Help OK Cancel 38 Using Your Printer in Linux The following four tabs display at the top of the window General allows you to change the paper size the paper type and the orientation of the documents enables the duplex feature adds start and end banners and changes the number of pages per sheet eText allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options such as spacing or columns Graphics allows you to set image options that are used when printing images files such as col
133. e A network operating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Organic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper Originals The first example of something such as a document photograph or text etc which is copied reproduced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else OSI Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branch exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language PCL is a Page Description Language PDL developed by
134. e Page 9 4 e File Format Selects the file format of the scan output Page 9 5 e File Policy You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the scan job through USB Page 9 5 e Back Returns to the previous screen Changing the scan feature settings This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job such as resolution duplex original size type color mode darkness and more The options you change will be maintained for a certain time but after that period the options will be reset to default values Duplex This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned are two sided You can select whether the machine scans only one side of the paper or both sides of the paper Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Use left right arrows to toggle the values e 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided For originals that are printed on both sides e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 For originals that are printed on both sides But the back is rotated 180 degrees Note To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 you have to load the originals on the DADF Because if the machine can not detect the original on DADF automatically changes the option to 1 Sided Resolution You can adjust document resolution Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Use left right arrows to toggle the values
135. e reports such as System Report Fax Report and Scan Report Page 11 1 Tray Status The screen shows the trays installed on your machine and their current configurations Select the tray and Edit to change the settings for paper type and size You can view the amount of each category that your machine has printed so far To print this report see page 10 9 Usage Counters General settings Before you get ready to using the machine it is recommended to set up the machine parameters 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Factory setting is 1111 3 Press the General tab O aa Device Info The sub options available are Service Center Registration and Contact Info You may enter information on service center and purchasing point Date amp Time You can set the date and time Page 3 5 Default Settings e Default Window Set the first window that will appear on the display screen after turning on the machine or waking up from the Power Save For example if you select Fax as a default window the first window will be the Basic tab of the Fax feature In case you want to show ID Copy as a default window you need to enable this feature in Default Option previously Default Option Changes all the default values for copying faxing emailing scanning and paper at once Page page 3 6 Home Allows user to arran
136. e value e 1 Sided Is for the originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided Is for the originals that are printed on both sides Resolution Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received document Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Use left right arrows to toggle the values 4 Sandan gt Standard Usually recommended for originals with text This option will reduce the transmission time e Fine Recommended for the originals containing with small characters thin lines or text that was printed using a dot matrix printer e Super Fine Recommended for originals containing with extremely fine detail this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also supports a Super Fine resolution Note For memory transmission Super Fine mode is not available The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine Original Type You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a document being scanned Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Original Type Select the appropriate option on the screen and press OK e Text For originals with text or line art Text Photo For originals with both text and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photographs Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the original document Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Darkness Press the right arrow to enhance the darkness degree and p
137. e Auto Tray Switch If tray1 and tray2 are filled with letter size paper when tray1 is empty and this option is On then the machine continues printing with paper in tray2 Auto Continue When the paper is mismatched meaning that tray 1has filled with the letter size paper but the printing job needs A4 size paper the machine will wait for 30 seconds to paper in tray1 with proper sized paper After 30 seconds the machine automatically starts printing with Letter sized paper Paper Substitution When the paper is mismatched this option sets the machine print A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or vice versa Wide A4 It is useful when printing in DOS mode This option prints 80 charactors in a line which printing 78 charactors in a line is usual in DOS mode Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the machine above sea level This feature lets you adjust the altitude in a height district Higher altitude location need to set this feature to High 3 which affects print quality Output Options is for when the staples run out you to let the machine stop processing and wait to refill the staples or continue the job If you set Within Job Offsetting to On the output paper is placed and sorted by job unit This feature lets you to select the priority between copy jobs and print jobs e Priority Set the priority by numbering the job The machine starts from
138. e Check the environmental conditions very dry conditions low humidity or a high level of humidity higher than 80 RH can increase the amount of background shading Remove the old imaging unit and then install a new one Page 11 4 Clean the inside of the machine Contact a service representative Check the paper type and quality Page 4 3 Remove the imaging unit and then install a new one Page 11 4 Background scatter Misformed characters AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Suggested solutions Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals e The imaging unit may be damaged If a repetitive mark occurs on the page run a cleaning sheet through several times to clean the cartridge contact a service representative After the printout if you still have the same problems remove the imaging unit and then install a new one Page 11 4 Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the defects occur on the back of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page e The paper may be too damp Try printing with a different batch of paper Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture If background scat
139. e Print window QUA WN FE 4 Using Windows PostScript Driver If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your system CD ROM to print a document PPDs in combination with the PostScript driver access printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the Supplied software CD ROM This chapter includes Printer Settings You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you need when using your printer When the printer properties are displayed you can review and change the settings needed for your print job Your printer properties window may differ depending on your operating system This Software User s Guide shows the Properties window for Windows XP Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use NOTE e Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver Change all print settings available in the software application first and change any remaining settings using the printer driver e The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program To make your changes permanent make them in the Printers folder e The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help 1 Click the W
140. e container carefully not to drop it from your hands DADF feed roller MEA ADF roller Approx 200 000 Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat pages rf that the t d t spill paaa sa nanan Multi purpose tray MEA unit holder pad Approx 50 000 5 Remove the container s cap from the container as shown below rubber pad pages and use it to close the waste toner container openings Guide exit duplex MEA unit exit duplex Approx 100 000 pages Paper feed roller MEA unit roller PU Approx 100 000 pages Pickup roller ELA HOU MP pickup Approx 100 000 pages We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized service provider dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine The warranty does not cover the replacement of the Caution maintenance parts after their lifespan Do not tilt or turn over the container 6 Take a new waste toner container out of its package 7 Insert the new container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place 8 Close the front cover then the side cover 9 Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on Caution If the cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate 1 1 8 lt Maintenance gt Managing your machine from the website If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP IP network parameters correctly you can manage the machine via Samsung s Sy
141. e following You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug adaptor or at the distribution board Declaration of Conformity European Countries Approvals and Certifications The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93 68 EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated January 1 1995 Council Directive 73 23 EEC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council Directive 89 336 EEC 92 31 EEC approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co Ltd representative EC Certification Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive FAX This Sa
142. e fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Gateway A connection between computer networks or between a computer network and a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots HDD Hard Disk Drive HDD commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral for example a printer Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols network
143. e scanner glass e Custom Margin Adjusts the margin of the left and right top and bottom as you want using arrows This option supports both on the scanner glass or in DADF 5 Press OK 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Gray enhance copying When you copy the original in gray scale use this feature for the better quality of copy output This feature is only for the copy in gray scale 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Or load the Originals face up in the DADF Page 4 1 Press Copy from the Main screen Press the Image tab gt Scan Enhance Press On to activate this feature Press OK Press Start on the control panel to begin copying O oo fF O N 5 8 lt Copying gt 6 Faxing Optional This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine This chapter includes e Preparing to fax e Understanding the Fax screen e Sending a fax e Receiving a fax e Adjusting the document settings e Setting up a fax phonebook e Using the polling option e Using Mailbox e Printing a report after sending a fax e Sending a fax in toll save time e Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job e Forwarding a received fax to other destination e Setting up the end fax tone e Setting up receiving faxes in color Note e We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services PSTN public switched telephone network when connecting telephone lines to
144. e the corresponding Smart Panel Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select your printer name e The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this Software User s Guide may differ depending on the printer or Operating System in use The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the printer the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s and various other information You can also change settings amp Buy Now Troubleshooting Guide rinter Setting f 3 Driver Setting Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s The printer and the number of toner cartridge s shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in use Any printers do not have this feature Buy Now You can order replacement toner cartridge s online Troubleshooting Guide You can view Help to solve problems Printer Setting If you connect your printer to a network the SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility window Driver Setting Only for Windows You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you need for using your printer For details See Printer Settings on page 15 Opening the Troubleshooting Guide Using the troubleshooting guide you can view solutions for error status problems Right click in Windows or Linux
145. e to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax or an email If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful Note e When you forward a fax by an email you firstly set the mail server and IP address in SyncThru Web Service e If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On you cannot use a fax with the On Hook Dial button on the control panel Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other destination by faxing 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Fax Setting gt Send Forward 6 Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel 7 Press OK Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax With this feature you can forward every fax you received to other destination by faxing When the machine receives a fax a fax Is stored in the memory then the machine sends it to the destination you have set 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to F
146. ears on the screen display of the control panel indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced Otherwise your printer stops printing To replace the waste toner container 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Open the side cover 12 Turn the imaging unit locking levers inwards until it locks in place and close the inner cover 3 Open the front cover 13 Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place 14 Close the front cover then the side cover 15 Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on Caution KI If the cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate 1 1 f lt Maintenance gt 4 Push the lock lever up and pull the waste toner container out M Maintenance Parts To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life span of each item has expired Transfer belt unit Cartridge transfer Approx 100 000 images Transfer roller MEA unit TR 2 Approx 100 000 a moo SE T2 pages A maa Fuser unit ELA unit fuser Approx 100 000 pages Note DADF rubber pad RMO ADF rubber Approx 50 000 When you pull out the waste toner container out of the pages machine move th
147. ect the Delete On Poll option If you select Off the sent fax data will be remained in the machine s memory even after it s printing If you select On the fax data will be deleted at the printing point 7 Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling 8 Give the Passcode to the receiver Printing Deleting the polling document 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Press the Advanced tab gt Polling gt Print or Delete 3 Enter Passcode 4 Press OK Polling a remote fax This option allows you to retrieve poll a fax which is stored in the remote machine 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Press the Advanced tab gt Polling gt Poll from Remote AY Heady lo Fax A Ger Mama cannot ba ernest Snore Pall rena Rerneta Drika Hire Gebry Seri Fiort Sand Deire Poll From Laan Dee emote Puting Malia Bak Note Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a specific time within 24 hours 3 Enter Passcode and destination fax number using the number keypad on the control panel You have to be informed Passcode from sender with the remote fax machine 4 Press OK Polling from a remote Mailbox This option allows you to retrieve poll a fax which is stored in the Mailbox of on the remote machine Before you start polling you must be informed of Mailbox No and Passcode from the sender Page 6 9 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Press the Advanced tab gt Mailbox
148. ee the table below to clear the problem Suggested solutions Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page e The toner supply is low You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life If this does not improve the print quality install a new toner cartridge The paper may not meet paper specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough Page 4 3 If the entire page is light the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off See the help screen of the printer driver and refer to Software section respectively A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning Contact a service representative The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative Toner specks The paper may not meet specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough Page 4 3 The transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Contact a service representative The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative Dropouts AaBbCc AaBbUc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If faded areas generally rounded occur randomly on the page e A single sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting the job The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist s
149. eeessaeceeessaeesesssaeeeeesas 11 2 Checking Stored Documents aa akn GANANG AALAGA 11 2 Ceanna AAP AA ERES 11 2 Cleaning te 0 1c 6 gt aan ene eee ee ne ee AP 11 2 Cleaning kia 11 2 Cleaning as AA O 11 2 Maintaining the toner cartridge ccccccsssscccceseeecesceeceuscecsuseeceeusesseacesseacesseeesseaeesseaeceseaecessaeeessgeeessseeessaseessagess 11 3 TOME mo lala 0 2 S Giolla CA AA AA 11 3 Expected cartridge life aaa AA AA Aa AA 11 3 Rodio le kae E E E T 11 3 Replacing the toner cartridge cccccssscecsesceccsseeecencessesecsseueeeceucesseusceseaeeesegeceseuseessaseessegecssusecsseaeessesecssseessnsaeees 11 4 Replacing ne imaging UNIT aaa BA AN NGA ANA NAIA NAA AO 11 5 Replacing the waste toner container aaa 11 7 MAN TIAN CE PANO cinco cencchaetecausabanrcunetadsntasiteaterad E saidenenenaiinntondetaveidanoumtintatancinTantiaaiias N a 11 8 Managing your machine from the website 101111110101010 rrenen reene 11 9 12 Troubleshooting Tips f r avoiding paper jamo AA AGA AA 12 1 Clearing document jams U 1 11 1 11 12 1 Misteed ko KOI AA 12 2 Roller MEI AA AA ANA NAA AA AA 12 2 NA 12 3 GA Tl ma AA AA AA AA NANA AA 12 3 ANG OEM NEY SAAD AA eb O GA ANG AU NG MAA AA deine 12 5 In the optional high capacity feeder 1 111177171027010 12 6 In the multi purpose tray AGA dedecasddedadelacdeeacdetscasbactsenede deans 12 7 In the paper inside the ma
150. en 10 and 70 Store unused print media in a moisture proof wrap such as a plastic container or bag to prevent dust and moisture from contaminating your paper Load special media types one sheet at a time through the multi purpose tray to avoid paper jams To prevent print media such as transparencies and label sheets from sticking together remove them as they print out Guidelines for special print media Envelopes e Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes When selecting envelopes consider the following factors Weight The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond or jamming may occur Construction Prior to printing envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not contain air Condition Envelopes should not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged Temperature You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds Do not use stamped envelopes Do not use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope receptae L Unacceptable P Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more tha
151. ent depending on which cable you use to connect the printer to your computer the network cable or the USB cable For a Network connected NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface Before connecting your printer make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide Mac OS 10 1 or higher 1 Follow the instructions on Installing Software on page 42 to install the PPD file on your computer 2 Open the Applications folder gt Utilities and Print Setup Utility e For MAC OS 10 5 open System Preferences from the Applications folder and click Printer amp Fax 3 Click Add on the Printer List e For MAC OS 10 5 press the icon then a display window will pop up 4 For MAC OS 10 3 select the Rendezvous tab e For MAC OS 10 4 click Default Browser and find the Bonjour e For MAC OS 10 5 click Default and find the Bonjour The name of your machine appears on the list Select SECOOOxxxxxxxxx from the printer box where the XXXXXXXXxX varies depending on your machine 5 For MAC OS 10 3 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer name in Model Name eFor MAC OS 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model e For MAC OS 10 5 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your printer name in Prin
152. er type and size for the tray See page 4 9 for copying and faxing or Software section for PC printing Note If you experience problems with paper feed place one sheet at a time in the multi purpose tray 4 7 lt Loading originals and print media In the multi purpose tray The multi purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material such as transparencies postcards note cards and envelopes It is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper Tips on using the multi purpose tray Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi purpose tray To prevent paper jams do not add paper when there is still paper in the multi purpose tray This also applies to other types of print media Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into the multi purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Page 4 2 Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the multi purpose tray To load paper in the multi purpose tray 1 Open the multi purpose tray and unfold the multi purpose tray extension as shown 2 Ifyou are using paper flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading For transparencies hold them by the edges and avoid touching the print side Oils from your fingers can cause pr
153. ernational Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards ITU T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication ITU T No 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile transmissions JBIG Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality which was designed for compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images 16 2 lt Glossary gt JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP IP LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine MAC
154. es PCL 6 or Samsung paper do not tray Load paper of only one type size and default printer CLX 8380 Series PS as your feed weight default printer in your If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam Windows h jam P 12 clear the paper jam Page 12 3 Check the machine for the following Paper does not Remove any obstructions from inside the e The side cover is not closed Close the side cover feed into the machine e Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam Page 12 3 machine Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove e No paper is loaded Load paper Page 4 7 paper from the tray and reload it correctly e The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not There is too much paper in the tray Remove installed Install the toner cartridge or imaging unit excess paper from the tray If a system error occurs contact your service The paper is too thick Use only paper that representative meets the specifications required by the machine Page 4 3 If an original does not feed into the machine the DADF rubber pad may require to be replaced Contact a service representative The connection cable Disconnect the printer cable between the and reconnect it computer and the machine is not connected properly 12 15 lt Troubleshooting gt eae does not print continued The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source A print job is extremely slow The connection cable between the co
155. esh Renews the classes list e Add Class Allows you to add a new printer class e Remove Class Removes the selected printer class Scanners Configuration In this window you can monitor the activity of scanner devices view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices change device properties and scan images Unified Driver configurator Switches to Scanners configuration ko Shows all of the installed scanners Shows the vendor L E model name and type of your scanner EH e e Properties Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a document See page 39 Using Your Printer in Linux 37 Ports Configuration In this window you can view the list of available ports check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy State when its owner is terminated for any reason Unified Driver Configurator CU r Port configuration Visweeee idewimfpO devimfpl J devinfp2 dev mfp3 EE BVBVeWVe a Refresh Switches to ports configuration 7 a fdevinfpS fdevinfp6 fdevimfn fdevimfps dewmfp3 Help sevma ee Shows all of the available ports Shows the port type device connected to the port and status Selected port Port type USB Device Port is unused Exit ELECTRONICS e Refresh Renews the available ports list e Release port Releases the selected port Sharing Ports Between Printer
156. ess the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side Press Fax Ending Sound Press On Press OK N Oa C8 FB Setting up receiving faxes in color This function allows you to recieve faxes in color 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Rx Color Printing 6 Press On 7 Press OK 6 12 lt Faxing Optional gt Scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital files There are two ways to scan originals one is using the USB cable to directly connect the machine with your computer and the other is using the network scan feature which scans and sends to a specific destination via the network If you want to use the USB cable to scan originals refer to the Scanning part of Software section Your machine offers the following ways to scan an image using a local connection e Via one of the preset imaging applications Scanning an image launches the selected application enabling you to control the scanning process e Via the SmarThru program supplied with your machine e Via the Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver If you want to use the network scan feature press Scan on the display to open three options of Scan to Email NetScan and Scan to Server This chapte
157. etup This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine and the method of setting for the advanced machine setup Please read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine s diverse features This chapter includes e Machine Setup e Browsing the machine s status e General settings e Copy Setup e Fax Setup e Network Setup e Authentication e Optional Service e Adjusting the color contrast e Printing a report Machine Setup 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select the appropriate item for your occasion e Machine Status Shows the current machine status e Admin Setting Allows administrator to set up the machine When you press Admin Setting login message pops up Enter password and press OK Factory setting is 1111 e Tray Management Shows the currently installed tray and their status You can also change the paper settings for each tray e Usage Page Report You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Machine Status screen Press Machine Setup on the control panel and press Machine Status Tanaw Carrdigs C Pag Cart a Toner Cartrek M Paga Car Ll Toner Caridge Y Paga Count T Toner Carindgs K Paga Cound wo magang Lind E Paga Count a a w imaging Line MM Page Coat ma e Supplies Life tab Displays the remainders or the usage count of the machine supplies Use up down arrows to switch screens
158. first page copied At this time load the original s the other side facing down and press Yes then the machine starts scanning the second page of your original Light Dark Press more to see the values Using special copy features e Collated Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen you can select specific copy features ID card copying The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card e Staple Portrait Adds a single staple to all of your portrait oriented output gt THY e Staple Landscape Adds a single staple to all of your landscape Note oriented output The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature NI TT III 1 Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass EH where arrows indicate as shown and close the scanner lid 43h Sz Note The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker amp stapler Page 13 1 Selecting the type of originals l 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Press the Advanced tab gt ID Copy 5 4 lt Copying gt e Number of Images Select how many image
159. g button e Copies Setting In order to use this option first you need to set total number of copies from Paper tab When you make several copies and if you want to print some copies in color and some in grayscale use this option and select the number of copies in grayscale Color Adjust You can adjust the appearance of images by changing the settings in the Levels option Color Matching You can adjust the appearance of images by changing the settings in the Settings option Basic Printing 17 Advanced Options You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Options button e Raster Compression This option determines the compression level of images for transferring data from a computer to a printer If you set this option to Maximum the printing speed will be high but the printing quality will be low e TrueType Options This option determines what the driver tells the printer about how to image the text in your document Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your document Download as Outline When this option is selected the driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not already stored resident on your printer If after printing a document you find that the fonts did not print correctly choose Download as bit image and resubmit your print job The Download as bit image setting is often useful when printing Adobe This feature is available only when you use
160. g materials that contain large amounts of alcohol solvent or other strong substances can discolor or damage the cabinet e If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner we recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacuum cleaner toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint free cloth You can dampen the cloth slightly with water but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine Cleaning the inside Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner lid 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is clean and dry Scanner lid Scanner glass White sheet DADF glass A N 4 Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry 5 Close the scanner lid lt Maintenance gt Maintaining the toner cartridge Toner cartridge storage To get the most from the toner cartridge keep the following guidelines in mind e Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until ready for use e Do not refill the toner cartrid
161. ge The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by using a refilled cartridge e Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your machine To prevent damage to the toner cartridge do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Expected cartridge life The toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require The actual number may also be different depending on the print density of the pages you print on and the number of pages may be affected by operating environment printing interval media type and media size If you print a lot of graphics you may need to change the cartridge more often Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life e White streaks or light printing occurs e The toner related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display If this happens you can temporarily reestablish print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge In some cases white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Open the side cover 3 Open the front cover Note Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged Contact a service representative when print quality problems occur 4 Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine
162. ge 10 1 e This button allows you to move to Copy Fax Scan Stored Documents menu directly e Machine Status Shows the current status of the machine e Admin Setting Allows an administrator to set up the machine Tray Management Shows the currently installed tray and their status You can also change the paper settings for each tray e Usage Page Report You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Job Status button When you press Job Status button the screen shows the lists of currently running jobs queued jobs and completed jobs od Tyr Copy Coy y Copy Copy 004 soy JobJobNamne_4 Samang Janer 4 Cony 005 Copy JobJotNwene_ 5 Seanang Jk 5 Copy v v2 Tota 0 Delete As Close e Current Job tab Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending e Completed Job tab Provides the list of completed jobs e Active Notice tab Displays any error codes that have occurred e No Gives the order of jobs e Job Name Shows job information like name and type e Status Gives the current status of each job e User Provides user name mainly computer name e Job Type Displays details of the active job such as job type recipient phone number and other information e Detail Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the Current Job Completed Job and Active Notice list e Delete Removes the selected job from the list Delete All Removes all the jo
163. ge each function in the display screen Note Depending on the optional kit you installed or the category you selected the selectable options on the display screen may differ Measurements This option lets you change the measurement unit to use mm or inch and set the numeric separation comma or period Timers The machine cancels a printing job if data does not be received in specific time e System Timeout The machine returns to the default value after certain time the machine waits You can set a time for maximum 10 minutes e Held Job Timeout The machine holds a job for a specific time period You can set a time period for at least an hour Language It allows you to change the language that appears on the touch screen 10 2 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt EG IA Power Saver Tray Management Altitude Adjustment Output Options Contention Management You can reduce energy consumption by setting these features Power Saver has two options first Low Power Save turns off the scanner lamp under the glass Power Save turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan for the fuser unit Page 3 6 This feature allows you to select the tray and paper you use for a printing job Paper size paper type and paper color options are adjusted here Tray Confirmation Message is to activate the window asking whether you set the paper size and type for the just opened tray
164. hare name that users will easily identify If you want this printer to be the default printer click the button in Default field Setting up this printer on a server Next gt Cancel To install this software on a server select the Setting up this printer on a server checkbox 7 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you so desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership Necanscnsvcasvapsosedceavascnccectecascteensa cseustbed 7 I dlike to print a test page NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 11 Installing Printer Software in Windows Reinstalling Printer Software You can reinstall the software if installation fails 1 Start Windows 2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs your printer driver name Maintenance 3 Select Repair and click Next 4 The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer yo
165. he scanner glass Each portion is scanned and printed on by one in the following order IT IT ey 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 Ost p Note The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature 2 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab 5 Poster Copy Note If this option is grayed out select following options in the Basic tab to activate it Duplex to 1 gt 1 Sided Reduce Enlarge to Original 100 Paper Supply to Tray 5 Press On to activate this feature Press OK Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Note Your original is divided into 9 portions Each portion is scanned and printed one by one in the following order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Clone copying The machine prints multiple original images on a single page The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper size y lt ak rb 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 Note The original must be placed on the scanner glass in order to use this feature 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Select the tray in Paper Supply 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Clone Copy Note If this option is grayed out select following options in the Basic tab to activate it Duplex to 1 gt 1 Sided Redu
166. hed Labels Card stock or custom sized materials Preprinted paper Note e To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for use in laser printers When selecting labels consider the following factors Adhesives The adhesive material should be stable at your machine s fusing temperature Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page 15 1 Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing serious jams Curl Prior to printing labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm 5 inches of curl in any direction Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bubbles or other indications of separation Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm 3 86 inches wide or 148 mm 5 83 inches long In the software application set margins at least 6 4 mm 0 25 inches away from the edges of the material Letterhead must be pr
167. his printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use When the printer does not receive data for an extended ENERGY STAR period of time power consumption is automatically lowered ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S marks For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http www energystar gov Recycling Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner Po Correct Disposal of This Product Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with other commercial waste
168. ients addresses Cc is for copies to an additional recipient and Bcc is for the same as Cc but without their name be displayed 7 1 lt Scanning gt e Subject Message Subject and message of the email e Remove All Erases everything in the input area e Address Inputs the recipient s address just by pressing stored addresses You can store frequently used email addresses from your computer using the SyncThru Web Service Page 7 5 e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value e Back Returns to the previous screen If the network authentication is enabled the log off confirmation message popes up and closes Scan to Email NetScan If the authentication for network appears you have to enter user name and password to enter the NetScan screen Select NG Logout e No Lists the number in order for application programs e Application Shows the available application programs from your computer e Select Moves to the application program you have selected Scan to Server r 5 i Heady to Sean a Dine ilaiiboo Entry whould be selected e SMB Sends the scanned file to SMB Press SMB for that option e FTP Sends the scanned file to FTP Press FTP for that option e No Index number whi
169. ies PS printer A 5 Click the right mouse button on the machine icon and select 3 Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit Properties 6 For Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista select Device Settings 7 Select the amount of memory you installed from Printer Memory in the Installable Options section 8 Click OK Replacing the Stapler 4 Unpack the new staple cartridge When the stapler is completely empty the message for installing the staple cartridge appears on the display screen 5 Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit 1 Open the finisher cover YY 7 Close the finisher cover 14 2 lt Installing accessories Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit After installing the Fax kit you have to set up the machine in order to use this function 1 2 3 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 5 Press the General tab Press the Country Change the country then some the values for fax and paper size will be changed automatically for your country 14 3 lt Installing accessories gt 1 5 Specifications This chapter includes e General specifications e Printer specifications e Copier specifications e Scanner specifications e Facsimile specifications optional General specifications
170. ify in the printer driver Change all print settings available in the software application first and change any remaining settings using the printer driver e The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program To make your changes permanent make them in the Printers folder e The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help 1 Click the Windows Start button 2 Select Printers and Faxes 3 Select your printer driver icon 4 Right click on the printer driver icon and select Printing Preferences 5 Change the settings on each tab click OK Basic Printing 15 Layout Tab The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page The Layout Options includes Multiple Pages per Side Poster Printing and Booklet Printing See Printing a Document on page 14 for more information on accessing printer properties Printing Preferences Layout Paper Graphic Extras About Paper Orientation Landscape G C Rotate 180 Degrees Layout Options Layout Type Multiple Pages per Side Pages per Side 1 v Letter 8 50 x 11 00 in Double sided Printing mm inch a Printer Setting Copies 1 ist O None Quality Normal an a IF O Long Edge AAG O Short Edge Printer Default ELECTRONICS Paper Orientation Paper Orientation allows you to select the
171. ile cannot find a scanned image file cannot find the scanned image file after scanning forgot my ID Check your ID in the Server page in the Properties screen of the Network Scan program cannot view To view the Help file you need to have Internet the Help file Explorer 4 service pack 2 or above cannot use the Samsung Network Scan Manager on the Advanced page in the Network Scan program s Properties screen e Check if the scanned file is on your computer e Check Send image immediately to the specified folder using an associated default application on the Advanced page in the Properties screen of the Network Scan program to open the scanned image immediately after scanning Check your operating system Supported operating systems are Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista The machine is not working there is no display and the buttons are not working No dial tone sounds The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly The original does not feed into the machine Faxes are not received automatically The machine does not send The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality Stretched words appear on an incoming fax There are lines on the originals you sent The machine dials a number but the connection with the other fax machine fails Fax problems optional Suggested solutions e Unplug the power cord and plug it in again e Ensure that the
172. image Shows the properties of the image For further details about the Image Manager application refer to the onscreen help Using Your Printer in Linux 41 10 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built in USB interface or a 10 100 Base TX network interface card When you print a file from a Macintosh computer you can use the PostScript driver by installing the PPD file NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface Make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide This chapter includes e Installing Software e Uninstalling software e Setting Up the Printer e Printing e Scanning Installing Software The CD ROM that came with your printer provides you with the PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple LaserWriter driver only available when you use a printer which supports the PostScript driver for printing on a Macintosh computer Also it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a Macintosh computer Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer Turn on your computer and printer Insert the CD ROM which came with your printer into the CD ROM drive Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop Double click the MAC_ Installer folder Double click the Installer icon Enter the password and click OK The Samsung I
173. imes the machine rings before answering an incoming call Use this option to automatically print the page number date and time of fax reception at the bottom of each page You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people This feature restricts printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended If you select this option to On all incoming faxes go into memory A four digit Passcode is used when you want to print out received faxes in memory Page 6 5 e When receiving a fax containing pages longer than the paper loaded in the tray the machine can reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine If this feature is set to Off the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages If you set this option to On and set the discard size to 10 mm and the received data is longer then the currently set paper in the tray the machine minuses the specified segment set as the discard size You can set the machine to print out the fax on both sides of the paper or stapled Page 6 5 The machine can automatically redial a remote fax machine if it was busy You can set the number of redial attempts and an interval between attempts Selecting 0 for Redial Times means that the machine will not use this feature This controls the sound when a fax actually starts to transfer
174. in the printer You need only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your document Creating a New Page Overlay To use a page overlay you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image 1 Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay To save the document as an overlay access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 Click the Extras tab and click Edit button in the Overlay section In the Edit Overlay window click Create Overlay In the Create Overlay window type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path if necessary The default is C Formover Click Save The name appears on the Overlay List box Click OK or Yes to finish creating uh WU N nd O The file is not printed Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive NOTE The overlay document size must be the same as the documents you print with the overlay Do not create an overlay with a watermark Advanced Printing 24 Using a Page Overlay After an overlay has been created it is ready to be printed with your document To print an overlay with a document l Create or open the document you want to print 2 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14
175. in words or a phrase Used to show the steps of selecting or pressing items in order The example means press Copy from the Main screen press the Advanced tab and then press Clone Copy Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information Copy Setup Note The date format may differ from country to country Caution Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge a pages per minute Copy gt the Advanced tab gt Clone Copy See page 1 1 for Special features Items features options on the touch screen may differ between models depending on their configurations Finding more information You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources either as a print out or onscreen Quick Install Guide Online User s Guide Printer Driver Help Samsung website Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine Provides you with step by step instructions for using your machine s full features and contains information for maintaining your machine troubleshooting and installing accessories This user s guide also contains Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in various operating systems and how to use the included software utilities Provides y
176. indows Start button 2 Select Printers and Faxes 3 Select your printer driver icon 4 Right click on the printer driver icon and select Printing Preferences 5 Change the settings on each tab click OK 25 Advanced You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button B PS Advanced Document Settings o Lg Paperjoutput fin Graphic cel filo Document Options e Paper Output this option allows you to select the size of the paper loaded in the tray e Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs e Document Options this options allow you to set the PostScript options or printer features Using Help You can click 1 from the upper right corner of the window and then click on any setting Using Windows PostScript Driver 5 Using Direct Printing Utility This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files without having to open the files Printing There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing Utility From the Direct Printing Utility CAUTION window e You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print Deactivate the printing restriction feature and retry printing 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility Or double click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top The Direct Printing Utility window open
177. ine lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start copying with the lid open In the DADF Using the DADF you can load up to 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond paper for one job When you use the DADF e Do not load paper smaller than 69 W x 145 L mm 2 7 x 5 7 inches or larger than 216 W x 356 L mm 8 5 x 14 inches Do not attempt to load the following types of paper carbon paper or carbon backed paper coated paper onion skin or thin paper wrinkled or creased paper curled or rolled paper torn paper e Remove all staples and paper clips before loading e Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading e Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper e Do not load booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents having other unusual characteristics 4 1 lt Loading originals and print media gt To load an original into the DADF 1 2 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading originals Load the originals face up into the DADF Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray Caution Dust on the DADF glass may cause black streaks on the printout Always keep it clean Selecting print media You can p
178. ing System CUPS You can print on your machine from any such application l From the application you are using select Print from the File menu 2 Select Print directly using Ipr 3 Inthe LPR GUI window select the model name of your If necessary switch to Printers configuration 2 Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties 3 The Printer Properties window opens Printer Properties General Connection Driver Jobs Classes machine from the Printer list and click Properties Name S LPR GUI Print Properties j Location C IC k PO Status idle accepting jobs E Location Description Set as Default Description Page Selection Copies All pages Copies 1 100 1 Era C Even pages 5 O Oad pages iffieverse Ai Pages 33 10 C Some pages Enter page numbers and or groups of pages to print separated by P oT m ommas 1 2 5 10 12 17 1 1 Help OK Cancel The following five tabs display at the top of the window eGeneral allows you to change the printer location and name The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration eConnection allows you to view or select another port If you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use you must re configure the printer port in this tab eDriver allows you to view or select another printer
179. int quality problems 3 Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down Note Make sure you load one sheet at a time and hold the paper with two hands for the paper not to fall since the paper length is longer than the multi tray length 48 lt Loading originals and print media gt 4 Squeeze the multi purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper Do not force too much or the paper will be Setting the paper size and type bent which will result in a paper jam or skew l l l After loading paper in the paper tray you need to set the paper size and type These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes For PC printing you need to select the paper size and type in the application program you use on your PC See Software section 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 5 4 Press the General tab 5 Press the down arrow to switch the screen press Tray Management 6 Select tray and its options such as paper size and type 5 After loading paper set the paper type and size for the multi purpose tray See page 4 9 for copying and faxing or the Software 7 Press OK section for PC printing Note Note If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper select The
180. inted with heat resistant ink that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page 15 1 Letterhead ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect printer rollers Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage Before you load preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinted paper reducing print quality Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements 4 5 lt Loading originals and print media Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray To load longer sizes of paper such as Legal sized paper you need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray paper length guide paper width guide Note If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder refer to Quick Install Sheet to adjust paper size 1 Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length It is preset to Letter or A4 size depending on the country To load another size hold the lever and move the length guide to the corresponding position 2 After inserting paper into the tray while pinching the paper
181. ions gt Printer specifications Copier specifications a O TA Printing method Color Laser Beam Printing Copy speed Up to 38 cpm in A4 40 cpm in Letter Printing speed Up to 38 ppm in A4 40 ppm in Letter First copy out e From ready Less than 13 seconds time e From coldboot Less than 135 seconds Duplex printing speed Up to 33 ppm in A4 35 ppm in Letter Copy resolution DADF e Scan Up to 300 x 300 dpi Black amp Whit a a text text photo magazine photo e Print Up to 600 x 600 dpi text text photo magazine photo First print out time e From ready Less than 14 seconds e From coldboot Less than 135 seconds Color e From ready Less than 14 seconds Scanner glass Platen e From coldboot Less than 135 seconds e Scan Up to 600 x 600 dpi text text photo magazine photo Print resolution Up to 9 600 x 600 dpi effective output 600 x 600 x 4 dpi e Print Up to 600 x 600 dpi text text photo magazine Up to 1 200 x 1 200 dpi photo Printer language PCL5ce PCL6 PostScript 3 PDF Direct Zoom rate Scanner glass Platen 25 to 400 V1 4 DADF 25 to 200 Various Linux OS Multiple copies 1 to 999 copies e Mac OS X 10 3 10 5 a SDMC Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy Interface e High Speed USB 2 0 e Ethernet 10 100 Base TX a Print speed will be affected by operating system used computing performance application software connect on method media type medi
182. ions state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped However where prior notice is impractical the company may temporarily cease service providing that they a promptly notify the customer b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68 You should also know that e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment It is recommended that no other equipment except for a regular telephone share the line with your machine e If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores e When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers use a non emergency number to advise
183. ire electric shock and injury to persons CAUTION CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM DANGER LASER RADIATION AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM DANGER RADIATIONS INVISIBLES DU LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EVITER TOUTE EXPOSITION DIRECTE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE LESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO PERIGO RADIAGAO LASER INVISIVEL AO ABRIR EVITE EXPOSICAO DIRECTA AO FEIXE GEVAAR ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALEN BIJ GEOPENDE KLEP DEZE KLEP NIET OPENEN ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING VED ABNING UNDGA UDSAETTELSE FOR STRALNING ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DEKSEL APNES UNNGA EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPEN STRALEN AR FARLIG VAROITUS NAKYMATONTA LASERSATEILYA AVATTAESSA VARO SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA SATEELLE E FABRES WARE 5 9 0 HS AH Hog z ose FOJEA XA AWG American Wire Gauge Ozone Safety During normal operation this machine produces ozone The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator However it is advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area S If you need additional information about ozone please request your nearest Samsung dealer Power Saver T
184. irs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements 4 2 lt Loading originals and print media gt Specification on print media a a eee E EE Plain paper 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches e 520 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond for the tray1 bond paper for the tray1 AE NENE 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib 100 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib US Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches bond for the multi purpose bond in the multi purpose Oficio 216 x 343 mm 8 5 x 13 5 inches bond for the high capacity 20 Ib bond in the high JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 16 x 10 11 inches feeder capacity feeder ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 inches 210 x 297 mm 8 26 x 11 69 inches way say 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib 2 100 sheets of 80 g m A5 148 x 210 mm 5 82 x 8 26 inches 6 Statement 140 x 216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 inches 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 82 inches Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm 3 87 x 7 5 inches 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib 50 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond paper for the tray1 Envelope No 10 105 x 241 mm 4 12 x 9 5 inches 10 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib Envelope No 9 98 x 225 mm 3 87 x 8 87 inches in the multi purpose tray Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 inches Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm 6 37 x 9 01 inches Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm 4 48 x 6 38 inches Envelope C6 3 4 92 x 165 mm 3 62 x 6 5 inches Transparency Letter A4 Oficio Refer to the Plain paper section 138 to 146 g
185. isk Fax option kit Optional tray 2 3 High Capacity Feeder Stand Stacker amp Stapler Finisher Staple Cartridge FDI Foreign Interface Device kit _ SmarThru Workflow Network Interface Ethernet 10 100 Base TX Duplex printing a Printing on both sides of paper For ordering information for optionals Page 13 1 1 2 lt Introduction gt Machine overview These are the main components of your machine Front view ANNY ASIN N AN SA BEINA LA KIND NAA PA NK NG Lips NS K N A M is a mark for the optional device e The symbol Stand 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 DADF cover 1 CCD Lock DADF document width guides 2 Output support DADF document input tray 3 4 Multi purpose tray extension DADF document output tray Multi purpose tray paper width guides Scanner lid Scanner glass Control panel 6 7 8 9 Transfer unit Side cover Toner cartridge Front cover Imaging unit Multi purpose tray Waste toner container Tray 1 10 11 Optional tray lt Introduction gt 1 3 Rear view e The symbol is a mark for the optional device 1 Finisher Stacker amp Stapler 7 USB port 2 Finisher output tray Stacker amp Stapler 8 Network port 3 Finisher cover Stacker amp Stapler 9 Dummy for FDI Foreign Device Interface 4 USB memory port 10 1
186. it part FE Caution yl i Da a a To avoid tearing the paper pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam In the tray 1 1 Open the side cover 12 3 lt Troubleshooting gt 5 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out 2 Open the guide in the direction shown open the side cover and then close it to clear the error message on the display Once you remove the jammed paper here 3 Carefully remove the misfed paper in the direction shown 6 Close the side cover and insert the paper tray Lower the rear part of the Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the machine then insert it completely If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see any paper in this area stop and go to step 4 Lift the front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the machine 4 lt Troubleshooting gt 12 4 In the optional tray Note This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in the optional tray 2 Please refer to the next method for other optional trays since the method is same as the tray 2 1 Open the outer cover in tray 2 3 Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown To avoid tearing the paper pull it out gently and slowly If the paper does not m
187. l Installing Printer Software in Windows NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear Connect Device Setup can not find a connected device Check connection between your computer and the printer Please refer to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Turn on the power of the device 3 IF New Hardware Wizard is appeared close it 4 Click Next e After connecting the printer click Next e If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation e The installation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use 5 7 After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you choose to print a test page select the checkbox and click Next Otherwise just click Next and skip to step 7 If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung select the checkbox and click Finish You are now sent to the Samsung web site Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newslet
188. l ID Enters the group name Group Dial No Is automatically filled with the first free number If you want to assign to a different number use left right arrows 5 Press OK 6 Select an entry from Speed Dial List and press Add Repeat this step until you added entries you need O Raady to Fax mo Groep Name camat be empty Group Ded bit 6000 w Speed Dui Liat Ko Hdi 74 Debwi7345 pa Make sure the selected Speed Dial List is copied to the left pane Group list 7 Press OK to save the numbers Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web Service You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer using SyncThru Web Service 1 Open the web browser in your computer 2 Enter IP address of your machine then SyncThru Web Service shows Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Machine Settings gt Fax Setup gt Fax Phone Book 4 Select Speed Dial Individual Note Fax numbers are already stored in Speed Dial Individual can be used when selecting 5 Press Add 6 Enter Index Name and Phone Number Index you enter here will be the Speed Dial No in the display screen of your machine 7 Press Apply Note Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an csv file 6 7 lt Faxing Optional gt Using the polling option Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a document This is useful when the person with the original document is not
189. lak NA AGANE KANAN NA Ana 6 3 Delaying a fax transmission Maam NENENG ANGAT DAANAN 6 3 SPN a T Garment me ete tei et ey PE ee ted arom meres AT ree nee ie eee ee eee eee 6 4 Hee NAA AA AA AA AA 6 4 Changing the receive modes 1071777 a 6 4 Receiving manually in Telephone mode u 1110107777 nterne nenen 6 4 Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax mode 07007022m m aasasananasaanasnanananasasannnaansanasnnanananananns 6 4 Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone 6 5 RECEIVING in secure receiving mode u 00 211 6 5 Printing received faxes on both sides Of the paper 6 5 R ceving MG ASA MemOly AA AA KANOR AP eriin 6 5 Adjusting the document settings aaa AGNO AGA 6 5 LUDIEN EEI AG AA E A A T A E T AAE AA 6 5 FS SOU OT aee E AA E E 6 6 NVA EDE srie A E E E 6 6 BELA e cece E RE T A EA AA EE E 6 6 BAE Ba r ONO WING sorae E AA E NAAN E 6 6 COO EMOT a E NA AA 6 6 Seting UP a fax Phonebook crccnccaccatcreccansciexeceedeccou Geecstncusebececocssadezeshaekedexheeceednqeshddediadiuticecspcieddsedeaseonctecuslecceteaueda 6 6 Storing individual fax numbers Speed Dial No 112 a 6 7 Storing Group fax numbers Group NO u a 6 7 Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web Service a 6 7 Using the polling KO AA ener Onno a mn ee ec ee ee eee ee eee ee 6 8 Storing the originals for pol
190. lect a language from the drop down list 8 4 Select Typical installation for a network printer Click Next Select Installation Type em Select type that you want and click Next button c Typical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer PATTAYA Pr Typical installation for inetwork printer i Pababa mid Install softwares for a device that is on network Custom installation You can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cancel 5 The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next i XI Select Printer Port Select a port that will be used for your printer en CG TCP IP Port C Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list IP Port Name NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing Updat the installer from detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on uae this PC before continuing with the installation lt Back New Cancel e f you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP a
191. lect a language from the drop down list 4 Select Custom installation Click Next l Select Installation Type en Select type that you want and click Next button NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 11 Typical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer c Typical installation for a network printer Install softwares for a device that is on network Custom Installation Custom installation You can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cancel You can choose individual components to install and set a specific IP address l Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on For details about connecting to the network see the supplied printer s User s Guide 5 The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows Vista click Start All programs
192. led paper Do not mix paper types in a tray Use only recommended print media Page 4 9 Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the tray or facing down in the multi purpose tray If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5 B5 sized paper Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the tray If load the paper this way printing both sides of the paper Duplex is not supported Clearing document jams When an original jams while passing through the DADF the warming message appears on the display screen Caution To avoid tearing the document remove the jammed document gently and slowly Note To prevent document jams use the scanner glass for thick thin or mixed paper type originals 1 Remove any remaining pages from the DADF 2 Open the DADF cover 3 Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF BA K SS A Note If you see no paper in this area refer to Roller misfeed Page 12 2 4 Close the DADF cover Then reload the pages you removed if any in the DADF 12 1 lt Troubleshooting gt Misfeed of exiting paper Roller misfeed 1 Remove the remaining documents from the DADF 1 Open the scanner lid 2 Open the DADF cover 2 Grasp the misfed paper and remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands 3 Open the document
193. ling AA AA AA EEEE aE 6 8 Printing Deleting the polling document 177777 6 8 PONG GOIN TAN za E E IA A 6 8 Polling rom a remote MallDOK sseirissruossiiennnin aaae a kad 6 8 US MADOR ecra ead eee ees E AA AA AA E AA 6 9 e1 naisGerteasa he echo se cectg nei piccacl sins qpcie so Gedacdecceciaatetaanutenteb yah aasausdecdene 6 9 Stonng originals m INO teed gestation teetcotcea ce ete cietceeeersck ties nec AA AP NA MANA 6 9 Faxing to a remote Mailbox eecescescca AA ga ncceceh ache sseecasike oteaeinteh a aschd stmeestensanienckeetedcnsereenseeewaeact ess aeceeses 6 10 Printing a report after sending a fax nErenn rreren nnne 6 10 Sending a fax in toll save TIME ascese anie ere e ie E a EE i EE 6 10 Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job 6 11 Forwarding a received fax to other destination X XA 6 11 Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax 6 11 Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax 6 11 Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email 6 11 Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email 6 11 Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server nnn 6 12 Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server 6 12 STING UO the end Aa aR ES EENAA 6
194. lity problems occur 3 Open the front cover 4 Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine lt Maintenance gt 5 Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag 6 Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge Note If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 7 Hold the new toner cartridge by the handle and slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks in place 8 Close the front cover then the side cover 9 Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on Caution tv If the cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate Replacing the imaging unit Expected cartridge life The useful life of the imaging unit is approximately 30 000 pages The screen displays Replace xxx Imaging Unit when the imaging unit is near the end of life Otherwise your printer stops printing Imaging unit yield may be affected by the operating environment optional printing interval media type and media size For ordering information for imaging unit Page 13 1 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Open the side cover 3 Open the front cover lt Maintenance gt wipe it off with a dry cloth and light for more than a few minutes Cover i
195. lling Printer Software e Removing Printer Software e Installing mono printer driver NOTE The following procedure is based on Windows XP for other operating systems refer to the corresponding Windows user s guide or online help Installing Printer Software You can install the printer software for local printing or network printing To install the printer software on the computer perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on the printer in use A printer driver is software that lets your computer communicate with your printer The procedure to install drivers may differ depending on the operating system you are using All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning installation Installing Software for Local Printing A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer using the printer cable supplied with your printer such as a USB or parallel cable If your printer is attached to a network skip this step and go to Installing Software for Network Printing on page 8 You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method NOTE If the New Hardware Wizard window appears during the installation procedure click 3t in the upper right corner of the box to close the window or click Cancel Typical Installation This is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed 1 Make sure that the printer is con
196. lowly in sequence If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine try pressing 9 once again To change the x9 x to for example x3 follow the next steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Receive Start Code 4 Select On 5 Press left right arrows to display number 3 10 9 6 Press OK Receiving in secure receiving mode You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended In secure receiving mode all incoming faxes go into memory 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Secure Receive 4 Select On 5 Enter Passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on the control panel Note To deactivate the Secure Receive feature press Off In this case the received fax will be printed out Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper Set this duplex feature to save paper When the machine prints the received fax data it prints them on both sides of the paper 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message po
197. ly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner u
198. machine Open the front cover and remove the debris If an original does not feed into the machine the DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Suggested solutions The touch screen Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen does not show e Turn the machine off and turn it on again If anything the problem persists please call for service Transparencies Use only transparencies specifically designed stick together in for laser printers Remove each transparency as the paper exit it exits from the machine Paper feeding problems Suggested solutions Envelopes skew Ensure that the paper guides are against both or fail to feed sides of the envelopes correctly Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam Page 12 3 during printing Paper sticks e Ensure that there is not too much paper in the together tray The tray can hold up to 520 sheets of Printing problems paper depending on the thickness of the F Condition Suggested solutions Make sure that you are using the correct type gg of paper Page 4 3 The The machine is not Check the power cord Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan machine receiving power connections Check the the paper does not power switch and the power Humid conditions may cause some paper to print source stick together The machine is not Select Samsung CLX 8380 Multiple sheets of Different types of paper may be stacked in the selected as the Seri
199. machine to print the report after forwarding a fax set the Forward amp Print 7 Press OK Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server Note If Forward to Email Setting is on this option will be grayed out The server setting must be done in SyncThru Web Service prior to this option on 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Server Setting gt Send Forward 6 Press On 7 Press OK Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server Note If Forward to Email Setting is on this option will be grayed out The server setting must be done in SyncThru Web Service prior to this option on 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Server Setting gt Receive Forward 6 Press Forward 7 Press OK Setting up the end fax tone The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received can be turned on or off 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 Pr
200. mputer and the machine is defective The port setting is incorrect The machine may be configured incorrectly The printer driver may be incorrectly installed The machine is malfunctioning The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is not enough to access the print job The paper option that was selected in the printer properties may be incorrect The job may be very complex If possible attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job You can also try using a different printer cable Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port If the computer has more than one port make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one Check the printer properties to ensure that all of the print settings are correct Repair the printer software See Software section Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error Contact a service representative Get more hard disk space and print the document again For many software applications the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the printer properties Select the correct paper source See the printer driver help screen Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings Half the page is blank The machine prints but the text is wrong
201. msung product has been self certified by Samsung for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries In the event of problems you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd in the first instance The product has been tested against TS 103 021 To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard the European Telecommunication Standards Institute ETSI has issued an advisory document EG 201 121 which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TS 103 021 terminals The product has been designed against and is fully compliant with all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2001 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All
202. n Printers configuration has the two tabs Printers and Classes Printers Tab You can see the current system s printer configuration by clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window Unified Driver Configurator Switches to Printer mai Ts configuration 2 Shows all of the installed printer Shows the status aka sib model name and Mes URI of your printer 5 pia nag You can use the following printer control buttons e Refresh renews the available printers list e Add Printer allows you to add a new printer e Remove Printer removes the selected printer e Set as Default sets the current printer as a default printer e Stop Start stops starts the printer e Test allows you to print a test page to check if the machine is working properly e Properties allows you to view and change the printer properties For details see page 38 Classes Tab The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes Unified Driver Configurator mun Printers configuration Printers Classes Refresh Add Class Remove Class ka Shows all of the al printer classes Stop Properties About Help Shows the status of the UNANG class and the number of nar printers in the class Printers in class A RECTAONICS e Refr
203. n a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine Click Machine Settings Select Network Authentication on the General Setup of User Authentication web page Click Apply and OK Select the Authentication Type that you prefer Configure the values for each feature as follows Click Apply Network user authenticated by Kerberos 1 2 3 Enter the realm used for Kerberos login Select IP Address or Host Name Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name 5 6 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 88 You can add a backup domain as a previous step Click Apply Network user authorized by SMB 1 2 3 4 Qi Enter the domain that is used for SMB login Select IP Address or Host Name Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 139 You can add a backup domain as a previous step Click Apply Note User can add up to 6 alternate domains Network authorized user by LDAP 1 a A Ww N 10 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine Click Machine Settings and LDAP Server Setup Select IP Address or Host Name Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 389 Enter Sear
204. n feature settings 11011110 1 S EEEE SEEE EES EErEE nnne nn anneren 7 8 Bie CA AA ee ee 7 8 RESO aa GA AAP 7 8 ONIN SNe cesses cars se estes dead ss caren ae E Das aclenesey ace tec E 7 8 Onana IPE Ha sinensis cece esac AA AA AA 7 8 Color MODE naa AGA AA AA AA een eee 7 8 87 7 S S RAHA AA AA 7 9 Erase AC ORO UING ter did en cour AA AA AA Aaah need oun vcd ANA AA 7 9 SCAM tO BOC aaa Naa AA Aha aha 7 9 MANDY AA AA AA deceatexeaaheen 7 9 lE So E ee E A AE E EN A A E A ee A EA E eee 7 9 PEF a AA AA AA Aa E ES 7 9 Basic printing PAANO ATO COMON amen NAA ei wtn itl plese E E E E E E E 8 1 Canceling se PINON sch acne tt ee Yaan nAg a Aa AA AA 8 1 Using USB flash memory About USB memory ee 9 1 Understanding the USB screen u 1110111111110 0 9 1 Plugging in an USB memory device u 111 171 es rrttanr tran EEr ASA EEEESnEEEEar EEEE s nErenn rrenen rrenen 9 1 Scanning to an USB memory device U 11 111111 9 2 SCAN sereamk aman Aa aa EE E LAAN AAA 9 2 ce MO on AA AA PAG 9 2 BASIC DID e E AA AA AA NAA 9 2 NG a AA 9 2 Mage lan kaaa NA aa AN NAA AA AA AA AA AA 9 3 DAE Ce o EEE AAO AA AA O AA AA 9 3 Changing the scan feature Settings nanasa TA 9 3 DUDE a AA AN AA E AA ee ee ONG 9 3 RESO aaa ANA NAGANA NA NANGANGAIN E E 9 3 Jnana SIZE ene ee eee ere A ee 9 3 gnana Type ane nce er eee ner ee E HA 9 4 calor ROOG esas BANA AA AE AA AA AN E 9 4 DANE GA AA AGA ANA AA GAAN 9 4 ASS ACh OROUING AA AA AA
205. n lowercase keys and uppercase keys or vice versa Symbols Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the symbol keyboard Space Enters a blank between characters OK Saves and closes input result Cancel Cancels and closes input result 3 7 lt Getting Started gt 4 Loading originals and print media This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into your machine This chapter includes e Loading originals e Selecting print media e Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray e Loading paper e Setting the paper size and type Loading originals You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying scanning and sending a fax On the scanner glass Make sure that no originals are in the DADF If an original is detected in the DADF the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass To get the best scan quality especially for colored or gray scaled images use the scanner glass 1 Lift and open the scanner lid 2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass 3 Close the scanner lid Note e Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption e Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout Always keep it clean Page 11 2 e If you are copying a page from a book or magaz
206. n one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the printer s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page 15 1 The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope Avoid printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet lt Loading originals and print media gt Transparencies To avoid damaging the machine use only transparencies designed for use in laser printers Transparencies used in the printer must be able to withstand the machine s fusing temperature Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page 15 1 Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods of time Dust and dirt may accumulate on them resulting in spotty printing To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints handle them carefully To avoid fading do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled curled or have any torn edges Caution e Recommended media Transparency for a Color Laser Printers produced by HP Xerox and 3M e It is not recommended to use paperbacked transparencies such as Xerox 3R91334 which can cause a jam or be scratc
207. n the supplied CD ROM e The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the size of the image being scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions especially using enhanced dpi 28 Scanning Tool bar Working area Send to bar Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru Office Samsung SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for your machine You can use SmarThru Office to scan images or documents from local or network scanners Using Samsung SmarThru Office Follow these steps to start scanning using the SmarThru Office l Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Place your photograph or page on the document glass or DADF or ADF 3 Once you have installed Samsung SmarThru Office you will see the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop Double click the SmarThru Office icon Re Double click this icon SmarThru Office The SmarThru Office window opens eTool bar Allows you to use shortcut icons which activate the certain functions such as Scan Search etc eWorking area SmarThru Desktop Created within the standard Windows folder My Documents Sort on Disk Files of the folders which are not indexed will not be displayed in the Sort on Disk section Sort type are Da
208. n value or Auto If you set this option to Auto the machine senses and determines the size of the original Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Advanced tab gt Original Size Use up down arrows to go to the next screen Select the appropriate option and press OK Original Type You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a document being scanned Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Original Type Select the appropriate option and press OK MB Text Plater e Text For originals that have text or line art e Text Photo For originals that have both text and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photographs Color Mode Use this option to scan the original in Mono Gray or Color mode Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Select the appropriate option and press OK E nono e Color Uses color to display an image 24 bits per pixel 8 bits for each RGB is used for 1 pixel lt Scanning gt e Gray Uses the black gradation to display an image 8 bits per pixel e Mono Displays an image in black and white 1 bit per pixel Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output If your original document is light or faded press the right arrow to make the output darker Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Sc
209. nals in several formats e You can create a booklet using sequential 2 sided document production e There are special functions to erase punch holes staple marks and newspaper background e The print quality and image size may be adjusted and enhance at the same time Scan the originals and send it right away e Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using E mail SMB FTP or Networks scanning e Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email addresses and send the scanned image immediately e Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG TIFF and PDF formats Set a specific time to transmit a Fax Optional e You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also send the fax to several stored destinations e After the transmission the machine may print out the fax reports according to the setting 1 1 lt Introduction gt Use USB flash memory devices If you have a USB memory device you can use it in various ways with your machine e You can scan documents and save them to the device e You can directly print data stored to the device e You can back up data and restore backup files to the machine s memory Machine features The table below lists a general overview of features supported by your machine Included O Optional Paa USB 2 0 USB Memory PostScript Emulation DADF Duplex Automatic Document Feeder Hard D
210. ncThru Web Service an embedded web server Use SyncThru Web Service to e View the device information and check its current status e Change TCP IP parameters and set up other network parameters e Change the printer properties e Set the machine to send email notifications and update you on the machine s status e Get support for using the machine To access SyncThru Web Service 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows 2 Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go Your machine s embedded website opens 11 9 lt Maintenance gt 1 2 Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information on what to do if you encounter a problem This chapter includes e Tips for avoiding paper jams e Clearing document jams e Clearing paper jams e Understanding display messages e Solving other problems Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media types most paper jams can be avoided When a paper jam occurs follow the steps outlined on page 12 3 Follow the procedure on page 4 7 Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly Do not overload the tray Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing Flex fan and straighten paper before loading Do not use creased damp or highly cur
211. ncher which is on the right end of taskbar to open the Scan Setting window easily e In other operating systems beside Windows XP click the SmarThru icon K in the tray area of the windows taskbar to activate the SmarThru Office launcher SmarThru Office ize Scan Setting lets you use the following services Select Scanner Select the Local or Network scanner Local Scan After scanning with parallel port or USB port you can store the scanned output in image or document file Network Scan After scanning via network you can store the scanned output in JPEG TIFF or pdf file To use network scanner your computer should install the Network Scan Manager and register the scanner within that program Refer to Scanning chapter in user s guide Scan Settings Allows you to customize settings for Image type Resolution Scan Size Paper Source Scan To Allows you to customize settings for File Name File Format OCR Language 5 To start scanning click Scan NOTE f you want to cancel the scan job click Cancel Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office NOTE Before beginning uninstallation ensure that all applications are closed on your computer 1 From the Start menu select Programs 2 Select SmarThru Office and then select Uninstall SmarThru Office 3 When your computer asks you to confirm read the statement and click OK 4 Click Finish Using Onscreen Help File For more information abou
212. ne on a remote machine Each mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number name and password Page 6 9 e Back Returns to the Basic tab Image tab Bak e Original Type Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the original document being scanned Page 6 6 e Darkness Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax Page 6 6 e Erase Background Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns as in newspaper originals Page 6 6 e Color Mode Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or color Page 6 6 e Back Returns to the Basic tab Sending a fax This part explains how to send a fax and the special methods of transmission Note When you place the originals you can use either the DADF or the scanner glass Page 4 1 If the originals are placed on both the DADF and the scanner glass the machine will read the originals on the DADF first which has higher priority in scanning Setting the fax header In some countries you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Machine ID amp Fax No 4 Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax number 5 Press OK Sending a fax 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF 3 Adju
213. ne side of the paper or both sides of the paper Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Use left right arrows to toggle the values e 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided For originals that are printed on both sides e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 For originals that are printed on both sides But the back is rotated 180 degrees Note To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 you have to load the originals on the DADF Because if the machine can not detect the original on DADF automatically changes the option to 1 Sided Resolution You can adjust document resolution Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Use left right arrows to toggle the values The higher value you select the clear result you get But the scanning time may take longer eT Commonly 100 dpi 200 dpi and 300 dpi resolution are available only when Color Mode is set to Color or Gray The following table shows detailed information feature resolution and file format options oo Festo ere Scan to Email 100 200 300 400 PDF Single Page 600 TIFF Multi Page TIFF JPEG NetScan 100 200 300 400 PDF TIFF JPEG 600 Scan to Server 100 200 300 400 PDF Single Page 600 TIFF Multi Page TIFF JPEG Original Size You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the pre defined size or putting in the margi
214. nected to your computer and powered on 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows Vista click Start All programs 5 Accessories Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below English SAMSUNG Cancel e If necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 Select Typical installation for a local printer Click Next Select Installation Type em Select type that you want and click Next button sissenensensensensenannnensenssnssensnsensensensenseneey O Me sepals for a Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s Rescsceeesevebecsevesssesesossccosceesecsecssovsessesvel computer c Typical installation for a network printer Install softwares for a device that is on network C Custom installation You can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cance
215. ng Machine Fax mode To use this mode you must attache an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine Page 1 4 If the caller leaves a message the answering machine stores the message as it would normally If your machine detects a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to receive the fax 6 4 lt Faxing Optional Note e If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings If your answering machine has a user selectable ring counter set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is connected to your machine you must switch off the answering machine or the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation While the machine is receiving a fax you can not do the copy job Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones press the keys 9 onthe extension phone The machine receives the fax Press the buttons s
216. ng on the web site icon See Printing a Document on page 14 for more information about accessing printer properties Printer Tab If you access printer properties through the Printers folder you can view the Printer tab You can set the printer configuration The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help Click the Windows Start menu Select Printers and Faxes Select your printer driver icon Right click on the printer driver icon and select Properties Click the Printer tab and set the options Ul A WN pe Using a Favorite Setting The Favorites option which is visible on each properties tab allows you to save the current properties settings for future use To save a Favorites item l Change the settings as needed on each tab 2 Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box mm inch Resolution 600 dpi Favorites Printer Default w ELECTRONICS 3 Click Save When you save Favorites all current driver settings are saved To use a Saved setting select the item from the Favorites drop down list The printer is now set to print according to the Favorites setting you selected To delete a Favorites item select it from the list and click Delete You can also restore the printer driver s default settings by selecting Printer Default from the list Using Help Your printer
217. nge the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the Watermark section The Edit Watermarks window appears Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options Click Update to save the changes Click OK until you exit the Print window Deleting a Watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 From the Extras tab click the Edit button in the Watermark section The Edit Watermarks window appears Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete Click OK until you exit the Print window 8 4 a Regards WORLD BEST WORLD BEST Using Overlays What is an Overlay An overlay is text and or images stored in the computer hard disk drive HDD as a special file format that can be printed on any document Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay containing the exact same information that is currently on your letterhead To print a letter with your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper
218. ns of one system with a different system so that the second system behaves like the first system Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated often considering its internal state Ethernet Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Foreign Device Interface FDI is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the Internet or an intranet Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media It consists of a hot roller and a back up roller After toner is transferred onto the paper th
219. nstallation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use 6 Select the components to be installed and click Next T ypical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer Select components that you would like to install P5nmsunag Select components c Typical installation for a network printer Install softwares for a device that is on network Select components that you would like to install O Custom installations fou can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back New Cancel Chanae Destination Folder 5 Select your printer and click Next lt Back Cancel Select Printer Port en Select a port that will be used for your printer Local or TCP IP Port Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port NOTE You can change the desired installation folder by clicking Browse Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list IP Port Name 7 After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you choose to print a test page select the checkbox and click Next NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing the installer from detecting the printer Tem
220. nstaller window opens Click Continue Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed If you select Custom Install you can choose individual components to install 9 The message which warns all application will close on your computer appears Click Continue ON QURA U N FF 42 10 Select Typical installation for a local printer and then click OK 11 After the installation is finished click Quit NOTE e If you have installed scan driver click Restart e After the installation is finished see Setting Up the Printer on page 43 Uninstalling software Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software or if installation fails 1 Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer Turn on your computer and printer Insert the CD ROM which came with your printer into the CD ROM drive Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop Double click the MAC_ Installer folder Double click the Installer icon Enter the password and click OK The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue Select Uninstall and click Uninstall The message which warns all application will close on your computer appears Click Continue 10 When the uninstallation is done click Quit WON OUR WU N Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Setting Up the Printer Set up for your printer will be differ
221. nt with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service Ringer Equivalence Number The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls especially ringing when your line is called The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company In some cases a sum of five may not be usable on your line If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network WARNING FCC Regulat
222. nter User s Guide If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM When you select an option in printer properties you may see an exclamation 2s mark or mark An exclamation mark means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended and mark means you cannot select that option due to the machineis setting or environment The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application program you are using Refer to the User s Guide of your software application for the exact printing procedure 2 Open the document you want to print Select Print from the File menu The Print window is displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application 14 The basic print settings are selected within the Print window These settings include the number of copies and print range General Select Printer a g Add Printer PG Make sure that your E Print to file a 8 Find Printer Printer printer is selected Number of copies 1 s i 3 3 All 3 Select your printer driver from the Name drop down list To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver click Properties or Preferences in the application s Print window For details see Printer Settings on page 15 If you see Set
223. nter properties See Printing a Document on page 14 From the Layout tab choose Multiple Pages per Side in the Layout Type drop down list Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet 1 2 4 6 9 or 16 in the Pages per Side drop down list Select the page order from the Pages Order drop down list if necessary Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet Click the Paper tab select the paper source size and type Click OK and print the document a wD Printing Posters This feature allows you to print a single page document onto 4 9 or 16 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 2 Click the Layout tab select Poster Printing in the Layout Type drop down list 3 Configure the poster option You can select the page layout from Poster lt 2x2 gt Poster lt 3x3 gt Poster lt 4x4 gt If you select Poster lt 2x2 gt the output will be automatically stretched to cover 4 physical pages eatin ow GG IM Ny A 3x3 Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it easier to pasting the sheets together 0 15 inches hk A TS D SA Re 4 Click the Paper tab select the p
224. of originals Duplex 2 a 5 3 Deciding the form of copy output Collated Staple a 5 4 Selecting ING type of originals AA 5 4 Changing the darkness Geen ene ee oR io SEERA EEEE eee 5 4 Using special copy features 1111 11 5 4 IBe Keke eeh i AA AA 5 4 Copying ID with the manual ID copy option a 5 5 27 Or AUP CONYO NARUD AA AA AA 5 5 POSE CODING AA E AA AA AA AA 5 6 COINS CO o AA AA AA AA AA AA vssindietesnndardcaeeaSesecateee uateect 5 6 BOOK CON INO maa AA GG AA AA AA 5 6 BUGLIEICOD ING aaa ANA NAA AA AA 5 7 CONCPCOD ING tia AA AA NAA AA Aap 5 7 ila ASG dre NA AA AA AA setae gece es dace cence ors E 21 916218 6 aa E AA eee an nee ee ee 5 7 Erasing DACKONOUNIG IMAGES vecccnceiceze vaceaasasennneneseteine decteseatsaeussactnaatelseaieeilacnsbextoaiscinnedeaneseusiessadeesoubeenenebe eeedetveceanoeuee 5 8 SS MPU HA AAAH APO 5 8 Gray SUVA SAGO AA 5 8 6 Faxing Optional Fe GN A E AT E AA AA ANA AA 6 1 Understanding the Pax screen ma NDN asaan Jn NLA 6 1 BASIC VAD san AA AA AA AA AA AA 6 1 Advanced tab AA AA PA 6 2 ARATE coe C 0 emer Ney E nett E re ae ee A E ee 6 2 Sending CA 6 2 Setn IME Tax NE AOS sata amen ed abad aan Ya E waaa kapa 6 2 O AA AA ca setae depidnee ence oneueusaareeesiencdes 6 2 Sending a lax manually Q0 HOOR Dial sisri E E O a a i 6 3 Automate resending sa AANO TINA AY AA AA ieie aie i enin AE 6 3 Redialing the last number a
225. oll save time to save a telephone fee If you send a fax after setting this feature fax data will be stored in machine s memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll save time 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side Press Toll Save O a A WwW Press On a Admin Setting ata Dina Malbax Emir ecru ba nalacind Copy Setup Fax Seton mamma BB on End Time Agthentication Optional Senke v oe cone 7 Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left right arrows lt Faxing Optional 8 Press OK 9 Press End Time and set the end date and time with left right arrows 10 Press OK Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved in memory 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK Page 3 5 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side Press Send Batch Press On Press OK When you send a fax if a fax number is same as the number in delay fax the machine asks whether you want to add more documents to reserved delay fax N o Oa Bb Forwarding a received fax to other destination You can set the machin
226. olor space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7 06 or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 xx when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB color space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8 xx or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com It is a Known problem that occurs when a color printer is used on version 8 51 or earlier of Ghostscript 64 bit Linux OS and reported to bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug 688252 The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v 8 52 or above Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http sourceforge net projects ghostscript and install it to solve this problem 12 24 lt Troubleshooting gt Common Macintosh problems PDF file does not print Incompatibility between the PDF file and correctly some parts are the Acrobat products missing in the graphics Printing the PDF file as an image may text or illustrations enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options Note It will take longer to print when you print a PD
227. on again If the problem persists please call for service Check the IP address or obtain a new IP address Remove printouts from the stacker Remove printed outs from the output tray The transfer belt of the machine is not for your machine Install the a Samsung genuine part designed for your machine The life of the transfer belt expires totally Replace the part with a new one Call for service Message Waste tank is full Replace it USE AUXILIARY ACCESS The life span of the waste toner container has expired and the printer will stop printing until a new waste toner container is placed into the printer The credit is not enough to access the job according to Foreign Device Suggested solutions Replace a waste toner container with a Samsung genuine waste toner container Page 11 7 Insert credit into the Foreign Device 12 14 lt Troubleshooting gt Solving other problems Suggested solutions The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the anag Keep There is ea Paba o recommended solutions Follow the suggested solutions until the J 9 capes Li terial A y re p 9 problem is corrected If the problem persists please call for service a EE E MAP UpOag An incorrect type of paper is being used Use Touch screen problem only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine Page 4 3 There may be debris inside the
228. one side of originals and prints them on both sides of the paper EHF e 1 gt 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 Scans one side of the originals and prints on both sides of the paper but the information on the back side of the print out is rotated 180 2 gt 1 Sided Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of one on a separate sheet 2 gt 2 Sided Scans both sides of the original and prints on both sides of the paper This function produces exactly the same print out from the originals 2 gt 1 Sided Rotate Side 2 Scans both sides of the original and prints each one on a separate sheet but the information on the back side of the printout is rotated 180 degree SE Reverse 1 gt 2 Sided Scans originals and prints them on both sides of a paper But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals The machine prints the second original first which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper For instance if you print 6 sheet of original papers every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a paper and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a paper pili Reverse 1 gt 2 Sided Rotate Sided2 Scans originals and prints them on both sides of a paper But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals The machine prints the second original first which means the firstly input original is printed on the ba
229. onfiguration button Using the Unified Driver Configurator Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring Printer or MFP devices Since an MFP device combines the printer and scanner the Unified Linux Driver Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and scanner functions There is also a special MFP port option responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and scanner via a single I O channel After installing the Unified Linux driver the Unified Linux Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1 Double click Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver Configurator 2 Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the corresponding configuration window Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration Refresh C gt wS Add Printer kami Remove Printer Set as Default Stop Test Properties About Help Selected printer Local printer icle Model am Exit You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help 3 After changing the configurations click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator Using Your Printer in Linux 36 Printers Configuratio
230. onitor SRGB Monitor Vivid mode is appropriate for printing presentation data and charts The color tone of Vivid mode produces more Vivid color images than that of Standard mode Device mode is best used for printing fine lines small characters and color drawings The color tone of Device mode may be different from that of monitor the pure toner colors are used for printing Cyan Magenta and Yellow colors Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft pages l From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu 2 Select Layout Printer Presets Standard Layout Pages per Shaf 1 ae 1 Layout Dir ction Ea ESI n 13 2 Preview Save As PDF Fax Cancel A Mac OS 10 3 3 Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop down list 4 Select the page order from the Layout Direction option To print a border around each page on the sheet select the option you want from the Border drop down list 5 Click Print and the printer prints the selected number of pages on one side of each page 46 Duplex Printing You can print on both sides of the paper Before printing in the duplex mode decide on which edge you will be binding yo
231. ons Common PostScript problems Faxes do not store in memory The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are being used There may not be enough memory space to store the fax If the display shows the low Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages with a small strip of text at the top memory message delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory and then try to store the fax again Please call for service You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting For details about paper settings Page 4 9 Common Windows problems Suggested solutions File in Use message appears during installation General Protection Fault Exception OE Spool32 or Illegal Operation messages appear Fail To Print A printer timeout error occurred messages appear Note Exit all software applications Remove all software from the StartUp Group then restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver Close all other applications reboot Windows and try printing again These messages may appear during printing Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing If the message appears in standby mode or after printing has been completed check the connection and or whether an error has occurred Refer to Microsoft Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista User s Guide that came with your PC
232. ont Setting AA 3 7 Understanding the keyboard 1002101111 aaa 3 7 4 Loading originals and print media Loading elo Lc AA AA AA AAP 4 1 DWTS scanner eS AA AN aNG AA AA Aap Naan 4 1 a Wr aaa ease aa specie se oe nae ANA aise AA radeon hace lesa aa anan dana maga 4 1 TSMC DIM MEd dr E E E E E S 4 2 Specification on print media 1X AA a 4 3 Media sizes supported in each mode u 11111177777710 0 mnene en 4 4 Guidelines for selecting and Storing print media 2 2 2XXXXX a 4 4 Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray a 4 6 UO AGING OCG maa UA AA ARA 4 7 Loading paper in tray 1 optional tray or optional high capacity feeder 4 7 HEY WS MUON OSC TAV AA AA ae 4 8 Setting the paper size ANG TYNE ceesesiaaceviataventsecndensevestetecdecddncddecadesaveteiesidivededecieaveddniudstacdualecssveeietesetextandeveeuestatendiexeds 4 9 5 Copying Understanding ine Copy SC CCIM csi assets ha ceatpretdes ete esac cademeetetsetmetiaauetea P 5 1 FAI VAD ZA AA AA AA AA 5 1 Anc ed AD aaa oe ene AA E eee nee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee eee eee 5 1 agtzle UNO setae cee se AA AA AA APA AA 5 1 COR ING Oroa AH AA AA esate te T ee eee 5 2 Changing the settings for each copy a 5 2 Changing the size of originals aaa ree AA 5 2 Reducing or enlarging copies 1021111 nenene rnern 5 3 Copying on both sides
233. or options image size or image position Device allows you to set the print resolution paper source and destination 5 Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window 6 Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing 7 The Printing window appears allowing you to monitor the Status of your print job To abort the current job click Cancel Printing Files l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l You can print many different types of files on the Samsung machine device using the standard CUPS way directly from the command line interface The CUPS Ipr utility allows you do that But the drivers package replaces the standard Ipr tool by a much more user friendly LPR GUI program To print any document file i l 1 Type lpr lt file name gt from the Linux shell command line and press Enter The LPR GUI window appears l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l When you type only Ipr and press Enter the Select file s to print window appears first Just select any files you want to print and click Open 2 Inthe LPR GUI window select your printer from the list and change the printer and print job properties For details about the properties window see page 38 3 Click OK to start printing 39 Using Your Printer in Linux Scanning
234. ormal Favorites Printer Default v ELECTRONICS cra Copies Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed You can select 1 to 999 copies Size Size allows you to set the size of paper you loaded in the tray If the required size is not listed in the Size box click Custom When the Custom Paper Setting window appears set the paper size and click OK The setting appears in the list so that you can select it Source Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray Use Manual Feeder when printing on special materials like envelopes and transparencies You have to load one sheet at a time into the Manual Tray or Multi Purpose Tray If the paper source is set to Auto Selection the printer automatically picks up print material in the following tray order Manual Tray or Multi Purpose Tray Tray n Basic Printing 16 Type Set Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print This will let you get the best quality printout If not print quality may not be acheived as you want e Thin Less than 19 Ib 70 g m thin paper e Thick 24 Ib to 32 Ib 90 120 g m thick paper e Cotton 20 Ib to 24 Ib 75 90 g m2 cotton paper such as Gilbert 25 Yo and Gilbert 100 96 e Plain Paper Normal plain paper Select this type if your printer is monochrome and printing on the 16 Ib 60 g m2 cotton paper e Recycled Paper 20 Ib to 24 Ib 75 90 g m2 recycled paper
235. ort Direct Printing Utility the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer opens Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section 2 Customize the printer settings for your needs 3 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the printer Using the right click menu 1 Right click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct Printing The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is added 2 Select the printer you will use 3 Customize the printer settings for your needs See the below part 4 Click Print Using the shortcut icon The selected PDF file is sent to the printer 26 Using Direct Printing Utility Sharing the Printer Setting Up a Host Computer Loca ly 1 Start Windows 2 From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer 3 Double click your printer driver icon which is called host computer on the network l l l 4 From the Printer menu select Sharing The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows 5 Check the Sh thi pees OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online ENG MAA SENS neem sO help 6 Fill in the Shared Name field and then click OK
236. ou with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing To access a printer driver help screen click Help from the printer properties dialog box If you have Internet access you can get help support printer drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsungprinter com Safety and Regulatory Information Important Precautions and Safety Information When using this machine these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to people 1 2 3 10 11 12 13 Read and understand all instructions Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information heed the safety information You may have misunderstood the operating instruction If you cannot resolve the conflict contact your sales or service representative for assistance Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and or telephone jack before cleaning Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners Use only a damp cloth for cleaning Do not place the machine on an unstable cart stand or table It may fall causing serious damage Your machine should never be placed on near or over a radiator heater air conditioner or ventilation duct
237. ource code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 lf you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tih cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWI
238. ove when you pull or if you do not see any paper in this area stop and go to step 4 4 Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the machine If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to step 3 5 Remove the paper in the direction shown To avoid tearing the paper pull it out gently and slowly is sili oa 2 d 2 z Ko 6 Insert the paper tray and close the two covers 12 5 lt Troubleshooting gt 4 Pull out the optional high capacity feeder In the optional high capacity feeder 5 Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the machine Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder 1 5 2 Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder 6 Remove the paper in the direction shown Pull it out gently and slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper in the direction shown pulling gently and slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper 3 Pull the jammed paper out or if the paper is stuck stop If the jammed paper is not visible pulling and continue on to step 5 If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see any paper in this area stop and go to step 4 lt Troubleshooting gt 12 6 In the multi purpose tray Insert the paper tray and close the two covers 7
239. pears click Next Unified Linux Driver Installer Welcome to the Unified Linux Driver installation wizard This program will install all necessary software for printers and MFP devices Click Next to continue with the Setup program Help Next gt Cancel 5 When the installation is complete click Finish Unified Linux Driver Installer Unified Linux Driver is installed Please re logon your system for all the installation settings to take effect m User Registration Do you want to register yourself as user of the printer MFP model you just installed Being registered you will gain access to various services X Yes want to be registered as user i Finish The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience If you have any difficulties consult the onscreen help that is available through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package windows applications such as Unified Driver Configurator or I mage Manager NOTE Installing the driver in the text mode e If you do not use the graphical interface or have failed the driver installation you have to use the driver in the text mode e Follow the step 1 to 3 then type root localhost Linux install sh then follow the instruction on the terminal screen Then the installation completes e When
240. play 800 x 480 7 inch WVGA Color graphic LCD with Touch Screen 16 bit color e Toner cartridge Average continuous black cartridge yield 20 000 standard pages Average continuous Yellow Magenta Cyan Consumables cartridge yield 15 000 standard pages Life e Imaging unit Approx 30 000 pages e Waste toner container Approx 48 000 images Standard 576 MB 512 MB main memory and 64 MB fixed memory Maximum Expandable to1088MB Maximum Expandable to1088MB to 1088 MB Slots One available DIMM slot for expandable memory External 606 8 x 575 0 x 815 5 mm without optional dimension trays 23 89 x 22 64 x 32 inches WxDxH Weight 71 5 Kg 157 63 Ibs including consumables Package weight Paper 9 7 Kg 21 38 Ibs Plastic 2 7 Kg 5 95 Ibs Fusing 180 C 356 F temperature a DADF Duplex Automatic Document Feeder The machine with this feature scans both sides of a paper Sound Pressure Level ISO 7779 Configuration tested machine basic installation A4 paper simplex printing May be affected by operating environment printing interval media type and media size It varies depending on the product configuration Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798 Image counts are based on one color on each page If you print documents in full color Yellow Magenta Cyan Black the image count will be added by 4 images O O m mp 2o 15 2 lt Specificat
241. ply Check adjust the paper guides if necessary Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight 75 g m 20 Ib bond paper is recommended Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared Frequent copy paper jams occur Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newsletters books or other documents that use more toner The machine may be turned on and off frequently The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made Scanning problems Suggested solutions The scanner does Make sure that you place the original to be not work scanned face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate Check that the printer cable is connected properly Make sure that the printer cable is not defective Switch the cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the cable Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check scan setting in the SmarThru Configuration or the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port The unit scans very slowly Check if the machine is printing received data
242. porarily disable the firewall on Update this PC before continuing with the installation Set IP Address lt Back Next gt Cancel Otherwise just click Next and skip to step 9 8 If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it 9 To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung select the checkbox and click Finish You are now sent to the Samsung web site NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear Connect Device Setup can not find a connected device Check connection between your computer and the printer Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Please reter to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer t Ft i FE 3 EAT NA Aa aa Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership 3 IF New Hardware Wizard is appeared close it 4 Click Next R esscceeseceecssocescooccococoosoeoesoostsoooceocsessse e After connecting the printer click Next e If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the
243. pots on its surface Try a different brand of paper Page 4 3 The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative 12 17 lt Troubleshooting gt Suggested solutions White Spots Vertical lines Color or Black background AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Toner smear AaBbCc AaBhCc AaBhCc AaBbCc AaBbCc White spots appears on the page e The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine so the transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Page 11 2 Contact a service representative The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative If black vertical streaks appear on the page e The drum inside the printer has probably been scratched Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Page 11 5 If white vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU Contact a service representative If vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the scanner glass and its white sheet may be dirty Clean these unit See 11 2 If this problem persists contact a service representative If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable e Change to a lighter weight paper Page 4 3
244. press the Release port button if you are sure that the port owner is not functioning properly lt Troubleshooting gt Possible Cause and Solution The machine does not scan cannot scan via Gimp Front end encounter error Cannot open port device file when printing a document e Check if a document is loaded into the machine Check if your machine is connected to the computer Make sure it is connected properly if an I O error is reported while scanning Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access for different consumer applications to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them is allowed to gain control over the device at a time The other consumer will encounter device busy response This usually happens while starting the scan procedure and an appropriate message box will be displayed To identify the source of the problem you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application
245. printer s features PostScript Printer Description PPD file Use the PostScript driver to print documents with complex fonts and graphics in the PS language Scanner driver TWAIN and Windows Image Acquisition WIA drivers are available for scanning documents on your machine Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing SmarThru Office This is the accompanying Windows based software for your multi functional machine Network Scan This program allows you to scan a document on your machine and save it to a network connected computer Direct Printing Utility This program allows you to print PDF files directly SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses Printer Printer driver Use this driver to run software CD your machine from a Linux computer Continue and print documents SANE Use this driver to scan documents Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing Macintosh Printer driver Use this file to run your machine from a Macintosh computer and print documents Scan driver TWAIN driver is available for scanning documents on your machine Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing a Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image
246. problems 12 20 the size of the originals 5 2 time 4 date 10 4 transparencies 5 7 copy setup 10 4 country setup 10 4 D DADF cover 1 3 input tray 1 3 output tray 1 3 width guides 1 3 darkness copying 5 4 faxing 6 6 scanning 7 9 9 4 date amp time 3 5 10 2 printing date amp time in copied out 10 2 10 4 default settings 3 6 altitude adjustment 10 3 changing the default settings 3 6 energy saver 10 3 language 10 2 loading paper 3 6 machine test 10 3 measurements 10 2 output option 10 3 setting a fax header 6 2 sound 10 3 supplies management 10 3 system timeout 10 2 tray management 10 3 tray setting 3 6 display screen 1 5 driver feature 2 2 installation 3 2 duplex copying 5 3 faxing 6 5 scanning 7 8 9 3 E email address entering email addresses to input field 7 5 Global 7 5 Group 7 5 Individual 7 5 storing 7 5 erasing background copying 5 7 faxing 6 6 scanning 7 9 9 4 erasing punch hole 5 7 error correction mode 10 4 error message 12 11 extension telephone 6 5 F fax option kit enabling option feature after installing the kit 14 3 ordering 1 2 13 1 fax receiving changing the receive mode 6 4 extension telephone 6 5 in answering machine fax 6 4 inmemory 6 5 receiving in duplex 6 5 secure receiving 6 5 fax sending automatic resending 6 3 delay sending 6 3 duplex sending 6 2 redialing the last number 6 3 sending afax 6 2 sending a fax manually 6 3 sending a priority fax 6 4 setting
247. produces the best possible print quality for color documents If you want to print a color document in grayscale select Grayscale Paper Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print This will let you get the best quality printout If you load a different type of print material select the corresponding paper type Presets Standard 53539 P PDF Preview Cancel C Print A Mac OS 10 4 45 Printer Features This tab provides options for selecting the paper type and adjusting print quality Select Printer Features from the Presets drop down list to access the following features Printer l HH Presets Standard HH Printer Features HA l Reverse Duplex Printing Fit to Page Prompt User He RGB Color Standard HY P PDF v Preview Cancel C Print AMac OS 10 4 Reverse Duplex Printing Allows you to select general print order compare to duplex print order If this option does not appear your printer does not have this feature eFit to Page This setting allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document eRGB Color This setting determines how colors are rendered Standard is the most widely used setting which the color tone of this mode is the closest to that of standard m
248. program that monitors and informs you of the status of the printer and allows you to customize the printer s settings Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the printer software NOTE e To use this program you need Windows To check for windows operating system s that are compatible with your printer refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide Mac OS X 10 3 or higher Linux To check for Linux systems that are compatible with your printer refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide Internet Explorer version 5 0 or higher for flash animation in HTML Help e If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM Understanding Smart Panel If an error occurs while printing Smart Panel appears automatically showing the error You can also launch Smart Panel manually Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar in Windows or Notification Area in Linux You can also click it on the status bar in Mac OS X Double click this icon in Windows BO 11 09 PM Click this icon in Mac OS X i Click this icon in Linux Ag Using Smart Panel 32 If you are a Windows user from the Start menu select Programs or All Programs your printer driver name gt Smart Panel NOTE e If you have already installed more than one Samsung printer first select the printer model you want in order to us
249. ps up then enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Received Fax Printing gt Duplex 4 Select appropriate option e Off Prints only one side of the paper e Long Edge Prints both sides of the paper however the binding will be the long edge e Short Edge Prints both sides of the paper however the binding will be the short edge 5 Press OK Receiving faxes in memory Since your machine is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory Then as soon as you finish copying or printing the machine automatically prints the fax Adjusting the document settings Before sending a fax you can adjust the document settings such as resolution darkness color duplex and so forth Refer to explanation of this section Note The document setting herein is for only current job If you want to change the default setting on document settings refer to Admin Setting gt General tab gt Default Settings Page 10 2 Duplex This function is especially intended for two sided originals You can select whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function 6 5 lt Faxing Optional gt Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Use left right arrows to toggle th
250. r 1a down If necessary pull the stacker lever 1b down as well A 2 Press right of 1c lever and then push stacker to left 3 Remove the jammed paper 3 Remove the jammed paper x O Oo O Cc gt O oO a O oO za O gt Cc gt pa gt Z O O a fad 79 oO G e Oo o dt 5 Close the stacker front cover lt Troubleshooting gt 12 10 4 Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover o f Understanding display messages Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control panel display to indicate machine status or errors Refer to the tables below to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem if necessary Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order Note e If the message is not in the table cycle the power and try the printing job again If the problem persists call for service eWhen you call for service it is very convenient to provide the service representative with the contents of display message e Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or models e xxx indicates the part of the each toner cartridge or each imaging unit e yyy indicates the part of the machine e zzz indicates the error code When you contact the service center this error code help to handle the problem Paper jam
251. r documents with words such as Confidential See Software section e Print posters The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster See Software section Save time and money e You can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper to save paper e You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper See Software section e This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use 1 Toi g e NI i E N Expand your machine s capacity e Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their memory Page 14 1 e A network interface enables network printing Your machine comes with a built in network interface 10 100 Base TX e Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3 Emulation PS enables PS printing Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3 Copyright 1995 2005 Zoran Corporation All rights reserved Zoran the Zoran logo IPS PS3 and Onelmage are trademarks of Zoran Corporation 136 PS3 fonts Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc Print in various environments A e You can print with Windows 2000 and Windows XP 2003 Vista as well as Linux and Macintosh systems e Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a network interface Copy origi
252. r gives you information about the scanning method and the different ways to send the scanned file to the destination This chapter includes e Understanding the Scan screen e User authentication for network scanning e Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email e Scanning originals and sending via NetScan e Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server e Changing the scan feature settings Understanding the Scan screen To use the scanning feature press Scan on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press tkw to go to the Main screen Note If the message asking Auth ID and Password it means the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service Page 11 9 Press Scan to Email NetScan or Scan to Server e Scan to Email Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination by email Page 7 4 e NetScan Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination with the Samsung Network Scan Manager program Page 7 6 e Scan to Server Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination with SMB and FTP Page 7 7 Basic tab This section explains the Basic tab of Scan to Email and Scan to Server and NetScan s basic screen Scan to Email NG Reedy to Emal tae Orea Miar Fry dha bo echoes af Ta Local Chota Cc Boc Subject peered AD dp j gt sax e From Sender s email address e To Cc Bcc Recip
253. r instance this could be an attempt to print documents when the port is claimed by a scanning application Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access for different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them is allowed to gain control over the device at a time The other consumer will encounter device busy response You should open the ports configuration and select the port assigned to your printer In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or you should press the Release port button if you are sure that the owner is not functioning properly Check if your application has special print options such as oraw If oraw is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly For Gimp front end select print gt Setup printer and edit the command line parameter in the command item The CUPS Common Unix Printing System version distributed with SuSE Linux 9 2 cups 1 1 21 has a problem with ipp Internet Printing Protocol printing Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install later version of CUPS cups 1 1 22 or higher Possible Cause and Solution The machine does not appear
254. r your machine The optional parts or features may differ by countries Contact your sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your country k Memory module Extand your machine s CLP MEM103 512 MB Supplies memory capacity Fax option kit This kit lets you use SCX FAX210 your machine as a fax Note After installing machine the kit you have to set up your machine to activate this machine See Page 14 3 Optional tray 2 3 If you are experiencing SCX S6555A frequent paper supply problems you can attach up to two additonal 520 sheet trays You can print documents in various sizes and types of print materials in each tray When the toner runs out or the life span of the supplies expires you can order the following types of toner cartridges and supplies for your machine Toner cartridge Average continuous CLX K8380A Black black cartridge yield 20 000 standard pages Average continuous CLX C8380A Cyan colored cartridge yield 15 000 standard pages PAra Yellow Magenta Cyan CLX Y8380A Yellow CLX R838XC Cyan CLX R838XM Magenta CLX R838XY Yellow Imaging unit Approx 30 000 pages CLX R838XK Black High Capacity If you are frequently SCX HCF100 Feeder experiencing paper supply problems you can attach an additional 2 100 sheet tray Waste toner Approx CLX W8380A eee eae eee container 48 000 images maging PNG me DSK10T ergonomically e Sho
255. rd with number keypad and press OK Page 3 5 4 Press the General tab 5 Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray Management 6 Select tray and its options such as paper size and type 7 Press OK Note If the optional tray is not installed the tray options on the screen is grayed out Changing the default settings You can set the default values for copy fax email scan and paper all at once 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 5 4 Press the General tab gt Default Settings gt Default Option 3 6 lt Getting Started gt 5 Press the function you want to change and change its settings PrinliRoport bal Gack For example if you want to change the default setting of the brightness amp darkness for a copy job press Copy gt Darkness and adjust the brightness amp darkness Press OK Changing the font setting Your machine has preset the font for your region or country If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition such as the DOS environment you can change the font setting as follows 1 Nn a ca A Ensure that you have installed the printer driver from the provided software CD Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar or Notification Area in Linux You can also click Smart Panel on the statu
256. re is power being supplied to the electrical outlet e Check that the phone line is properly connected e Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly Printa Fax Phone Book Page 6 6 Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly Check that the original is the right size not too thick or thin Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed The DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative The receiving mode should be set to Fax Make sure that there is paper in the tray Check to see if the display shows any error message If it does clear the problem Make sure that the original is loaded in the DADF or on the scanner glass Check the fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty A noisy phone line can cause line errors Check your machine by making a copy The toner cartridge may be empty Replace the toner cartridge referring to page 11 4 The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam Check your scan unit for marks and clean it Page 11 2 The other fax machine may be turned off out of paper or cannot answer incoming calls Speak with the other machine operator and ask her him to solve out the problem 12 21 lt Troubleshooting gt Suggested soluti
257. reorder notification Checking Stored Documents Cleaning your machine Maintaining the toner cartridge Redistributing toner Replacing the toner cartridge Replacing the imaging unit Replacing the waste toner container Maintenance Parts Managing your machine from the website Printing a machine report You can print the machine s information and job report 1 2 3 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Machine Status gt the Machine Info tab gt Print Report Select the report type then the right side of the screen shows the list to print Select the list to print System Report List mabayaran Gater Assista Hapon Error Message Paporit n Scan Report Error Information Report Configuration Report Fax Report Counter hiomuton Heip List ka 5 Press Print Note e If you want to print the machine s network information or font list press Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt the Print Report tab In case you select the Configuration Report just press Print Now to print the report The Fax Report E mail Confirmation Report and Scan to Server Confirmation options do not provide the print these are only for report setup You can use SyncThru Web Service to print the machine s configuration or browse the status Open the web browser in the networked computer and type the machine s IP address When SyncThru Web Service is opened click Information gt Print information Monitoring the supplies life
258. ress OK Light wal w Dark UC DD Erase Background You can lighten reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned colored paper or newspaper originals Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Press On to activate this function and press OK Note Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to Photo Color Mode You can transmit a fax in color using this feature But this feature only applies when you send a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Select option and OK e Mono Transmits a fax in black and white e Color Transmits a fax in color Note Color Mode faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually Page 6 3 Setting up a fax phonebook Use this feature to store destination names fax numbers and transmission settings in your machine There are two options Individual and Group Individual Group Individual Stores up to 200 fax numbers And the fax numbers which are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No Group Makes groups when you frequently send the same document to several destinations You can store up to 100 group dial numbers Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list on the Basic tab of Fax Dialing Group can be also setup comprising of many Individual entries The fax numbers which are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No lt Faxing
259. rint on a variety of print media such as plain paper envelopes labels and transparencies Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user s guide may cause the following problems e Poor print quality e Increased paper jams e Premature wear on the machine Properties such as weight composition grain and moisture content are important factors that affect the machine s performance and the output quality When you choose print materials consider the following e The type size and weight of the print media for your machine are described later in this section Desired outcome The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project Brightness Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper more vibrant images e Surface smoothness The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper Note e Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results This may be the result of improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which Samsung has no control e Before purchasing large quantities of print media ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user s guide Caution Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems requiring repairs Such repa
260. rol panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password Touch the password input area then the question marks appears use the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password Then press OK Factory setting 1111 4 Press the Setup tab gt Authentication 5 Press Change Admin Password 6 Enter old and new password and then confirm the new password 7 Press OK Setting the date and time When you set the time and date they are used in Delay fax and Delay Print also they are printed on reports If however they are not correct you need to change it for correct time being 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 5 4 Press the General tab gt Date amp Time gt Date84 Time 5 Select date and time using left right arrows Or touch the insert area and use the numeric keypad on the control panel 6 Press OK Note To change the format of date and time press Date Format and Time Format 3 5 lt Getting Started gt Changing the display language To change the language that appears on the display refer to the following steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 5 Press the General tab 4 5 Press the down arrow to
261. rom your computer Individual 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Machine Settings gt E mail Setup gt Individual Address Book Then the screen shows Individual Address Book on the right side of the screen 5 Click Add 6 When the Add E Mail screen appears select the Index number enter User Name and E mail Address 7 Click Apply 8 Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine by pressing Local 7 the Individual tab Group 1 Access to the SyncThru Web Service from your computer 2 Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book 3 Click Machine Settings gt E mail Setup gt Group Address Book Then the screen shows Group Address Book on the right side Click Add Select the Group number and enter Group Name Select email addresses by clicking the check boxes Click Apply oOo N O OA A Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your machine by pressing Group Global Email addresses which are stored in Global in your machine are processed by the LDAP server 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Machine Settings gt LDAP Server Setup Then the LDAP Server screen shows on the right side
262. rt Stand SCX a Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798 designed cabinet which DSK10S b Image counts are based on one color on each page If you print documents in lets you reach the Note If you do not use full color Yellow Magenta Cyan Black the image count will be added by 4 machine conveniently the optional tray then images Also you can easily Tall Stand is move the cabinet with recommended In case its wheels ifnecessary you add two optional and store trays use Short Stand miscellaneous items like papers into the cabinet 13 1 lt Ordering supplies and accesso nia How to purchase Stacker amp 500 sheets SCX FIN10S To order Samsung authorized supplies or accessories contact your local Stapler Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine or Finisher visit www samsung com supplies and select your country region to obtain Staple Cartridge 3 x 5 000 staples per SCX STP000 information on calling for technical support package covers maximum thickness of 50 sheets 1 staple position FDI Foreign This card is installed SCX KIT20F Interface inside the machine to Device kit allow a third party device such as a coin operated device ora card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine SmarThru Windows 2000 XP SCX KIT11S Workflow 2003 This feature lets you send additional information along with the scanned document
263. s 2 Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section and click Browse 3 Select the PDF file you will print and click Open The PDF file is added in the Select Files section 4 Customize the printer settings for your needs See the next column 5 Click Print e You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password Deactivate the password feature and retry printing Depending on how a PDF file was created it may not be able to be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer PDF files can or can not be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program e The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1 4 and below For a higher version you must open the file to print it The selected PDF file is sent to the printer Overview Direct Printing Utility 1 Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your printer without having to open the file It sends data through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer driver It only supports PDF format To installing this program you should select Custom installation and put a check mark in this program when you install the printer driver NOTE If the default printer does not supp
264. s and Scanners Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the parallel port or USB port Since the MFP device contains more than one device printer and scanner it is necessary to organize proper access of consumer applications to these devices via the single I O port The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers The drivers address their devices via so called MFP ports The current status of any MFP port can be viewed via the Ports Configuration The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP device while another block is in use When you install a new MFP device onto your system it is strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver Configurator In this case you will be asked to choose I O port for the new device This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for MFP s functionality For MFP scanners O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically so proper settings are applied by default Configuring Printer Properties Printing a Document Using the properties window provided by the Printers configuration you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer 1 Open the Unified Driver Configurator Printing from Applications There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print from using Common UNIX Print
265. s and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server You can scan an image and send it to a total of 5 destinations via the SMB or FTP Preparation for scanning to SMB FTP Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the scanned file Note The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru Web Service and the setting for FTP server is the same as SMB Apply the same steps for setting up the FTP server 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Machine Settings gt SMB Setup gt Server List The Server List is then displayed on the right side of the screen 5 Click Add 6 Select the index number from 1 to 20 7 Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server List entry This name will be displayed on your machine 8 Select IP Address or Host Name 9 Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name 10 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 139 11 Enter the share name of the server 12 Putacheck mark next to in Anonymous if you want to allow the SMB server to be accessed by unauthorized persons By default this is unchecked 13 Enter the login name and password 14 Enter the domain name of the SMB server 15 Enter the location for storing the scanned image This is the location you entered
266. s are on a page TOP i nahad a select number 4 ILOG Wace Sjarasgaaningane ma pusiaa e Image Position Select the position of a page which images are on If you choose to copy four images you have to select four positions here First Image Position LEFT TOP X 000mm Y 020mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 100mm Y 100mm e Second Image Position LEFT TOP X 105mm Y 020mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 205mm Y 100mm Third Image Position LEFT TOP X 000mm Y 150mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 100mm Y 230mm B pace canone coo aan ie eco Forth Image Position LEFT TOP X 105mm Y 150mm RIGHT ae p SU GORT BOTTOM X 205mm Y 230mm ote If this option is grayed out select the Duplex option to 1 gt 1 Sided 4 Press Start on the control panel 5 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid Copying ID with the manual ID copy option If you want to copy several ID cards on a paper or adjust the copying 7 Press OK dhe template vou have saved wiltbeshown inthe position of the page follow the next steps template list table Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people s driver s license bato cards 100mm X 80mm in one page 8 Press and select Copy 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then 10 Press the template you have saved from the template list enter password and press OK 11 Press the Start button on the control panel now follow
267. s bar in Mac OS X Click Printer Setting If your machine is connected to a network SyncThru Web Service screen appears automatically Click Machine Settings Click PCL Select your preferred font in the Symbol set list Click Apply Note Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding languages e Russian CP866 ISO 8859 5 Latin Cyrillic e Hebrew Hebrew 15Q Hebrew 8 Hebrew 7 Israel only e Greek ISO 8859 7 Latin Greek PC 8 Latin Greek e Arabic amp Farsi HP Arabic 8 Windows Arabic Code Page 864 Farsi ISO 8859 6 Latin Arabic e OCR OCR A OCR B Understanding the keyboard You can enter alphabet characters numbers or special symbols using the keyboard on the touch screen This keyboard is specially arranged like a normal keyboard for better usability for the user Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the keyboard pops up on the screen The keyboard below is the default showing the lowercase letters Oo a A WwW N 10 Le jl pa c MP Po LL KG NG a a GG a GG KG NG UG NN GA NO NG RG NG O NG Ieee wi Shiti OK Cancel lt Moves the cursor between characters in the input area Backspace Deletes the character on the left side of the cursor Delete Deletes the character on the right side of the cursor Clear Deletes all characters in the input area Input area Enters letters within this line Shift Toggles betwee
268. s for disposal Radio Frequency Emissions FCC Information to the User This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference and e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help Caution Change or modifications not expres
269. s not compatible Check useris guide xxx toner cartridge is not installed Install it xxx toner cartridge is worn Replace with new one The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your machine The toner cartridge is not installed or the CRUM Consumer Replaceable Unit Monitor in the cartridge is not properly connected Install a Samsung genuine toner cartridge designed for your machine Try to reinstall the toner cartridge The color toner cartridge has run out The machine stops printing Note If the black toner cartridge is empty Mono Only message does not appear You can select the option among Stop Continue or Mono Only If you select Stop the machine stops printing If you select Continue the machine keeps printing but the quality cannot be guaranteed If you select Mono Only the machine prints the data in black In this case the mono printing feature is preset in the printer properties When you copy the Start button will be activated only with this condition If you do not select any the machine will work as Stop is selected Replace the color toner cartridge with a new one Page 11 4 xxx toner is empty Replace toner cartridge xxx toner is low Order new toner cartridge DC motor does not operate zzz Please turn off then on The lifespan of the color toner cartridge which the arro
270. sage pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Print Report tab Description You can print Network Configuration PS3 Font List PCL Font List and Schedule Jobs Report Schedule Jobs Report shows the job list in pending in waiting in delayed faxing or the Mailbox list as well Accounting Reports Supplies Information You can print the amount of each category that your machine has printed so far Network Auth It displays user login IDs and emails Log Report Usage Page Report You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Accounting Reports Prints the report of printing out count for each login user This is used only when network authentication in enabled with SyncThru Web Service Page 11 9 ee 0 aan ee 8 0 a Report Configuration You can print a report on the Report machine s overall configuration Fax Report You can set to print the information of a fax reports Multi Send Report When you fax to several destination set this option to print a transmission report On is to print every time you send a fax the machine prints a confirmation report With On Error only when the transmission error occurred the report will be printed out Fax Send Report Appearance You can select whether the image on the confirmation report shows or not Fax Sent Received Report The machine stores the logs on each transmission and prin
271. sage will be as much as the coverage CSV Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications The file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a pseudo standard throughout the industry even among non Microsoft platforms DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP network DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DNS The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an ink so
272. set the Notification option to On you are notified when a fax is received in Mailbox Page 6 9 This feature lets you select the paper tray to use for receiving a fax Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save time for saving Page 6 10 The machine asks you whether you want to add the documents to the reserved delay fax if the fax number you have dialed is same as the delay fax number Page 6 11 You can forward a sent or received fax to other destination by a fax or an email Page 6 11 This setting selects whether the end fax tone is on or off Page 6 12 This function allows you to recieve faxes in color Page 6 12 Caller ID If you have set this option the machine remembers the last twenty fax numbers 10 5 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt Network Setup Authentication You may set up the network with the machine s touch screen Before This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data or change the doing that you must have the information concerning the type of network password protocols and computer system you use If you are not sure which setting to use contact your network administrator to configure this machine 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel eon 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel password and press OK 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter 3 Press the Setup t
273. sly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canadian Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques applicables aux appareils num riques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques ICES 003 dict e par l Industrie et Sciences Canada Fax Branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information 1 the date and time of transmission 2 identification of either business business entity or individual sending the message and 3 telephone number of either the sending machine business business entity or individual The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsiste
274. special copy job set the tray s Paper Types and Paper Size to Transparency Page 4 9 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass Page 4 1 Load the right sized transparencies into the tray you have set Set the paper type to Transparency Press Copy from the Main screen Press the Advanced tab gt Transparencies O a W N Select Transparencies option e No Separator Does not place separator sheets between transparencies e Blank Sheet Places a blank sheet between transparencies e Printed Sheet Places the same image on the divider sheets as printed on the transparency 7 Select media sources in case you selected either Blank Sheet or Printed Sheet Press OK Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Erasing edges b lt Copying gt 5 6 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Or load the Originals face up in the DADF Page 4 1 Press Copy from the Main screen Press the Image tab gt Erase Edge Select the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Border Erase Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies e Small Original Erase Erases 0 25 6mm from the edge of the copies The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature e Hole Punch Erase Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of the copies e Book Center and Edge Erase Erases sh
275. ss On 6 Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display select Start Time with left right arrows e If you do not enter Job Name the machine assigns the job name as Fax Send Job xxx xxx number are set in order Note Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent You can set Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than the current time For example if it is 1 00 then you can set the time starting from 1 15 If the set time is incorrect the warning message will appear and the machine resets it to the current time 7 Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory Note To cancel delaying a fax press Off before sending is activated Sending a priority fax This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of reserved operations The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished In addition priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between stations example when the transmission to station A ends before transmission to station B begins or between redial attempts 1 Press Fax from the Main screen Place the originals face up in the DADF Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab Press the Advanced tab gt Priority Send Press On Press OK YY a ma FF W N Press Start to start the urgent fax job Receiving a fax This section explains how
276. st the document settings in the Image tab 4 Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab Note If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper select 2 Sided with left right arrows in the Duplex feature 5 When the cursor is blinking in the input line enter the fax number using the number keypad on the control panel Or use Address on 6 2 lt Faxing Optional gt the right side of the screen if you have stored frequently used fax numbers Fax ho N18996187 pat Remove remove A 6 To add a number press Add No 7 Press Start on the control panel The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations Note e When you want to cancel a fax job press Stop before the machine start transmission Or press the Job Status button and select the job you want to delete press Delete e If you used the scanner glass the machine shows the message asking to place another page e While the machine is sending a fax you can not send an email at the same time Page 7 4 Sending a fax manually On Hook Dial 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up into the DADF Adjust the document settings in the Image tab Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab Press On Hook Dial on the control panel O a A WwW Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel If the number is which you have dialed recently press the Redial
277. switch the screen and press Language 6 Select the desired language 7 Press OK Setting job timeout When there is no input for a certain period of time the machine exits the current location You can set the amount of time the machine will wait 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting amp When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 5 Press the General tab Press Timers Select System Timeout Select On Select a duration using left right arrows Oo 0 N a A A Press OK Using power saving feature The machine provides power saving features 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK Page 3 5 4 Press the General tab 5 Press down arrow to switch the screen press Power Saver 6 Select appropriate option and time bil Back e Low Power Save Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under 100 C and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan for the fuser unit e Power Save Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after certain time 7 Press OK Setting the default tray and paper You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job Page 10 2 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter passwo
278. t SmarThru click 6 at the top right corner of the window The SmarThru Help window opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program Scanning Process with TWAIN enabled Software If you want to scan documents using other software you will need to use TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop The first time you scan with your machine select it as your TWAIN source in the application you use The basic scanning process involves a number of steps l Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass Open an application such as PhotoDeluxe or Photoshop 3 4 Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options 5 Scan and save your scanned image NOTE You need to follow the program s instructions for acquiring an image Please refer to the user s guide of the application 30 Scanning Scanning Using the WIA Driver Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver for scanning images WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners Unlike the TWAIN driver the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images without using additional software NOTE The WIA driver works only on Windows XP Vista with USB port Windows
279. t Using Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer 6 Click Add 43 For a USB connected Mac OS 10 1 or higher 1 Follow the instructions on Installing Software on page 42 to install the PPD file on your computer 2 Open the Applications folder gt Utilities and Print Setup Utility For MAC OS 10 5 open System Preferences from the Applications folder and click Printer amp Fax 3 Click Add on the Printer List eFor MAC OS 10 5 press the icon then a display window will pop up 4 For MAC OS 10 3 select the USB tab e For MAC OS 10 4 click Default Browser and find the USB connection e For MAC OS 10 5 click Default and find the USB connection 5 Select your printer name 6 For MAC OS 10 3 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer name in Model Name eFor MAC OS 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model eFor MAC OS 10 5 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your printer name in Print Using Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer 7 Click Add Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Printing NOTE e The Macintosh printer s properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties
280. t come with the printer and they can be modified or you can add new ones to the list Using an Existing Watermark 1 3 NOTE The preview image shows how the page will look when To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 Click the Extras tab and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop down list You will see the selected watermark in the preview image Click OK and start printing it is printed Creating a Watermark 1 5 6 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 14 Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the Watermark section The Edit Watermarks window appears Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box You can enter up to 40 characters The message displays in the preview window When the First Page Only box is checked the watermark prints on the first page only Select watermark options You can select the font name style size or grayscale level from the Font Attributes section and set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section Click Add to add a new watermark to the list When you have finished editing click OK and start printing To stop printing the watermark select No Watermark from the Watermark drop down list Advanced Printing 23 Editing a Watermark 1 To cha
281. t with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary Caution Don t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the imaging unit package You could damage the surface of the imaging unit Remove the paper protecting the surface of the imaging unit 8 9 Remove the cap and carefully pull the seal tapes out of the imaging unit 10 Thoroughly shake the new imaging unit side to side five or six times Note If toner gets on your clothing wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric Caution e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit e To prevent damage do not expose the imaging unit to lt Maintenance gt 11 6 4 Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle JA PS pe ee PR N Ea PIN N 9 A Y JEN X ANAN js the inner cover 6 Pull the used imaging unit out of the machine using the handle on its bottom 5 Turn the imaging unit locking levers outwards to release and open Remove the new imaging unit from its bag 7 11 Labels inside the machine identify each imaging unit s position Holding the handles on the new imaging unit push the imaging unit until it locks in place Replacing the waste toner container The life of the waste toner container unit is approximately 48 000 images printing When the life span of the waste toner container has expired Waste tank is full Replace it app
282. tart windows firewall and set this option unactivated For other operating system refer to its on line guide TIP If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific network printer click the Set IP Address button The Set IP Address window appears Do as follows Set IP Address en You can set or change IP address for the network printer IP Address MAC Address E lw Ki Mm gt ad Information Update Printer MAC Address IP Address f Configure Subnet Mask Default Gateway Cancel a Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the list b Configure an IP address subnet mask and gateway for the printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP address for the network printer c Click Next 6 Select the components to be installed After selecting the components the following window appears You can also change the printer name set the printer to be shared on 10 the network set the printer as the default printer and change the port name of each printer Click Next Set Printer P5nmsunog Change printer settings to be installed Printer Name Pot Default Printer Shared Name i fou can change the printer name by selecting the name and entering a new name in the Printer Name Field If you want other users on the network to access this printer click the check box in Share Name field and enter a s
283. te File Types Latest Used To add a folder for indexing press Edit menu gt Preferences Index It may take longer time to show the added file folders according to the computer performance and the number of added file folders NOTE e To do indexing and searching the PDF format file you must install Adobe Acrobat Reader 7 0 5 or higher e You can use indexing and searching functions using SmarThru Office supported by Microsoft Indexing Service This service is Supported in Windows 2000 or above Windows Folders Allow user to navigate through all the user s files and folders The right panel Reflects the content of a selected folder eSend to bar Run the corresponding application directly Drag and drop selected files to the appropriate application button Send by E mail To send documents by E mail while working within the SmarThru Office To send scanned images or documents by e mail you must have a mail client program like Outlook Express which has been set up with your e mail account Send by FTP To upload a document file to server while working within the SmarThru Office Send by Fax To send documents by Local or Network fax machine while working within the SmarThru Office Scanning 29 4 Click Scan on the tool bar of SmarThru Office window Adjust the scan settings Scan Setting Click to start scanning NOTE e In Windows XP operating system you can use SmarThru Office lau
284. tep by step instructions for setting up the machine This chapter includes This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in Quick Install Guide Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and Setting up the hardware Setting up the network Installing the software Using the SetiP program Altitude adjustment Machine s basic settings Understanding the keyboard Setting up the hardware complete following steps 1 Select a stable location Select a level stable place with adequate space for air circulation Allow extra space to open covers and trays Under the altitude 1 000 m 3 281 ft is effective for printing See the general settings for Altitude Adjustment in page 3 5 The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat cold and humidity Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table A Silo TYO m 100 mm 500 mm 59 che If 3 9 inches 19 7 inches ga 600 mm 23 6 inches A horizontal plane must be within 5 mm 0 02 inches both from front to rear and from right to left POT T Lah see 0 Caution e When you move the machine do not tilt or turn it up side down or the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the printer or bad printing quality e If you are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a long time turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the
285. ter occurs on an envelope change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application or in printer properties If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images the paper stock may be too slick Try different paper Page 4 3 If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy effect the scanner unit may need service Contact a service representative lt Troubleshooting gt Suggested solutions Suggested solutions Page skew e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Loose toner e Clean the inside of the machine Contact a Check the paper type and quality service representative Page 4 3 e Check the paper type and quality Ensure that the paper or other material is Page 4 3 loaded correctly and the guides are not too e Remove the imaging unit and then install a tight or too loose against the paper stack new one Page 11 4 e If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of Check the paper type and quality Both high characters that should be solid black temperature and humidity can cause paper curl Page 4 3 Turn the stack of
286. ters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership Aa hira a NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 11 Custom Installation You can choose individual components to install l Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer 2 3 and powered on Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows Vista click Start All programs 5 Accessories Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window Click Next It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below English v Cancel e If necessary select a language from the drop down list Installing Printer Software in Windows 4 Select Custom installation Click Next Select Installation Type en Select type that you want and click Next button e The i
287. that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum Inc to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architecture that is Originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant scanner lt Glossary gt INDEX A admin setting 10 1 altitude adjustment 10 3 answering machine fax 6 4 authentication network accounting 10 7 printing areport 10 2 10 9 setting up 3 5 10 2 auto center 5 8 B Book copy 5 6 C CCD Lock 1 3 checking stored document 11 2 cleaning inside 11 2 outside 11 2 scan unit 11 2 Clear 1 5 Clear All 1 5 Clone copy 5 6 collated 5 4 color mode faxing 6 6 scanning 7 8 9 4 control panel 1 3 1 5 COpy copying 5 2 covers 5 7 duplex copy 5 3 erasing background 5 7 erasing edge 5 7 ID stamp 10 4 making a booklet 5 6 page number 10 4 poster 5 5 reduce enlarge 5 3 shifting margin 5 8 solving copy
288. the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number e This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines e This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids e You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C Replacing the Fitted Plug for UK Only Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard BS 1363 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse When you change or examine the fuse you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse You then need to replace the fuse cover If you have lost the fuse cover do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover Please contact the people from you purchased the machine The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable However some buildings mainly old ones do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor Do not remove the moulded plug Warning If you cut off the moulded plug get rid of it straight away You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket Important warning You must earth this machine The wires in the mains lead have the following color code e Green and Yellow Earth e Blue Neutral e Brown Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug do th
289. the least to the highest number in order First In First Out The machine does an asked job in order e Supplies Management You can adjust the loudness of the machine sound Press Fault to adjust the machine s error sound Select Conflict if you pressed the wrong option Press Selection to sound whenever you press the selection from your touch screen The machine gives you the notification of the drum and toner to reorder and resets the used fuser counter bias transfer roller feed roller and document feeder friction pad counter Machine Test The machine prints the test image patterns using Image Quality Test Patterns On Demand Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information To activate this feature go to Admin Setting gt the Setup tab gt Optional Service and set the On Demand Image Overwrite option to Enable After activating this feature you can overwrite a HDD by pressing Start in the display HDD Spoolling To spool documents in HDD for the network printing select On Stored Job File Policy Country You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed with the job through HDD If the HDD memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name you can rename or overwrite it e Rename If you HDD memory already has the same name when you enter a new file name the file will be saved as a
290. the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Machine Status Supplies Life tab Page 10 1 Toner Cartridge C Toner Cartridge M Toner Cartridge Y Toner Cartridge K Imaging Unit C Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y Imaging Unit K Fuser Kit Feed Roller Kit Tray 1 Feed Roller Kit Tray 2 Feed Roller Kit Tray 3 Feed Roller Kit Bypass Tray Document Feeder Roller BTR Kit DADF Friction Pad Kit Machine Info tab Page 10 1 Machine Details Customer Support Machine Serial Number Hardware Options Configuration Software Versions Tray Status Tray Status Paper Size Paper Type Print Report System Report Scan Report Fax Report Usage Counters Total Impressions Black Impressions Black Copied Impressions Black Printed Impressions Color Impressions Color Copied Impressions Color Printed Impressions Sheets Copied Sheets Copied Sheets Color Copied Sheets Printed Sheets Black Printed Sheets Color Printed Sheets 2 Sided Sheets Copied 2 Sided Sheets Black Copied 2 Sided Sheets Color Copied 2 Sided Sheets DADF Scan Page Counts Platen Scan Page Counts Printed 2 Sided Sheets Black Printed 2 Sided Sheets Color Printed 2 Sided Sheets Analog Fax Sheets Analog Fax 2 Sided Sheets Fax Image Received Analog Fax Images Sent Analog Fax Images Received Images Sent Network Scanning Images Sent Email Images Sent Maintenance Impressions Black Maintenance Impressions Admin Setting General
291. tings drop down list To save a Job Type setting for the next scan Job 1 Select the setting you want to use from the J ob Type drop down list 2 The next time you open the Scanner Properties window the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan job To delete a Job Type setting 1 Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop down list 2 Click Delete A U Nhe The setting is deleted from the list Using the I mage Manager The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image Use these tools to edit the image MEIDA a You can use the following tools to edit the image Tools A Save is Undo a Reda k Scroll m Crop Zoom Out Zoom In a lo Scale br Rotate T Flip au Effect i GS Properties Function Saves the image Cancels your last action Restores the action you canceled Allows you to scroll through the image Crops the selected image area Zooms the image out Zooms the image in Allows you to scale the image size you can enter the size manually or set the rate to scale proportionally vertically or horizontally Allows you to rotate the image you can select the number of degrees from the drop down list Allows you to flip the image vertically or horizontally Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of the image or to invert the
292. tional memory The order information is provided for optional memory module Page 13 1 1 Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine 2 Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you control board cover 3 Take out a new memory module from the plastic bag 4 Holding the memory module by the edges align the memory module on the slot at about a 30 degree tilt Make sure that the notches of the module and the grooves on the slot fit each other 5 Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a click Note The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those on an actual DIMM and its slot 6 Replace the control board cover 7 Reconnect the power cord and printer cable and turn the machine on lt Installing accessories gt Activating the added memory in the PS printer 2 Pull the stapler unit out properties After installing the memory DIMM you need to select it in the printer properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it 1 Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your computer For details about installing the PS printer driver see Software section 2 Click the Windows Start menu 3 For Windows 2000 select Settings and then Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes IN gt A 4 Select the Samsung CLX 8380 Ser
293. tions section to Installed Try to print with the latest Adobe Reader program or print with turning on Print as Image option from Acrobat printing options It might take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image Turning off collation options on applications including CUPS pstops collation option may solve this problem If you want to use the collation option go to printer driver s advanced option and turn the collation on lt Troubleshooting gt Common Linux problems Possible Cause and Solution The machine does not print The CUPS Common Unix Printing System version distributed with SuSE Linux 9 2 cups 1 1 21 has a problem with ipp Internet Printing Protocol printing e Check if the printer driver is installed in your system Open the Unified Driver configuration tool and switch to the Printers tab in the Printers configuration window to look at the list of available printers Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list If not use the Add new printer wizard to set up your device e Check if the printer has started Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list Look at the description in the Selected printer pane If its status contains stopped string please press the Start button After that normal operation of the printer should be restored The stopped status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred Fo
294. to receive a fax and the special receiving methods available Changing the receive modes Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory When you receive a fax the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax But if you want to change the Fax mode to another mode refer to next steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Page 3 5 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Fax Initial Setup gt Receive Mode 4 Select the option e Telephone Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then Start e Fax Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode e Answering Machine Fax Is for when an answering machine attached to your machine Your machine answers an incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax 5 Press OK Note When the memory is full the machine can no longer receive any incoming fax Secure free memory to resume by removing data stored in the memory Receiving manually in Telephone mode You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine The machine begins receiving a fax Receiving automatically in Answeri
295. to search for additional components that might be necessary for the Unified Linux Driver software all required packages will be carried onto your system and installed automatically this is possible on a wide set of the most popular Linux clones Using Your Printer in Linux 34 Installing the Unified Linux Driver Installing the Unified Linux Driver 1 Make sure that you connect your machine to your computer Turn both the computer and the machine on 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password NOTE You must log in as a super user root to install the printer software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 3 Insert the printer software CD ROM The CD ROM will automatically run If the CD ROM does not automatically run click the icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in If the CD ROM is secondary master and the location to mount is mnt cdrom root localhost root mount t iso9660 dev hdc mnt cdrom root localhost root cd mnt cdrom Linux root localhost root install sh If you still failed to run the CD ROM type the followings in sequence root localhost root umount dev hdc root localhost root mount t is09660 dev hdc mnt cdrom NOTE The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package installed and configured 4 When the welcome screen ap
296. ts out every 50 logs with this option On It you select Off the machine stores the logs but does not print Fax Send Report The machine prints the confirmation report after each fax job only when you send a fax to one destination E mail The report shows the job of scanning Confirmation and sending it via Scan to Email Report On The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or failed Off No report is printed after completing a job On Error Only in case of error occurrence the machine prints the report Report Continue Scan to Server Confirmation The report shows the job of scanning and sending it via SMB and FTP e On The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or failed e Off No report is printed after completing a job e On Error Only in case of error occurrence the machine prints the report Note You can also print machine s status information and browse status with SyncThru Web Service Open the web browser on your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Information gt Print information 10 9 lt Machine status and advanced setup gt 1 1 Maintenance This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine This chapter includes Printing a machine report Monitoring the supplies life Finding the serial number Sending the imaging unit reorder notification Sending the toner
297. ture enhances the colored image sharper and clearer which means the machine prints the colored image on the paper more like the one in the monitor Select On to activate this feature You can set the frequency of performing the function by pages temperature of a machine or LSU Page Condition The machine performs this feature after certain number of page has been printed out Inner Temperature Condition The machine performs this feature if the machine temperature is different from the last this feature done If you set this option to 3 the machine detects the inner temperature and when the temperature difference is over or below three degree the machine will perform this feature You can set the temperature difference by clicking arrows LSU Temperature Condition The machine performs this feature if the temperature of LSU Laser Scanning Unit is different from the last this feature done If you set this option to 3 the machine detects the temperature of LSU and when the temperature difference is over or below three degree the machine will perform this feature You can set the temperature difference by clicking arrows Execute Now The printer executes the auto color registration now 10 8 Machine status and advanced setup gt Printing a report You can print a report on the machine s configuration or font list etcetera 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login mes
298. tures before starting to copy Note The Basic tab setting is only for each copy That means that the setting does not apply to the next copy job After finishing the current copy job the machine automatically restores the default settings after certain time Or the machine resume to default setting when you press the Clear All button on the control panel or when you press other menu such as fax or else except the Job Status screen The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting Page 10 2 Changing the size of originals Press the Basic tab gt Original Size then use left right arrows to set the Original size Press more to see the detail values IR ro PA T 2T3 Legal im 205 ee Ad BR otter Ng o cad e Custom Selects the scanning area of the original Press the cardinal point arrows to set the size e Auto DADF only Automatically detects the size of originals but this option supports only when originals are Legal Letter or A5 sized If the originals is mixed sized then the machine detects the largest original size and select the largest sized paper in the tray e Mixed Size Letter amp Legal DADF only Allows for the use of both of Letter and Legal sized papers together and the machine uses the proper sized paper from several trays For example if the originals are total 3 pages 1st page is the letter sized paper 2nd page is the legal sized paper and 3rd page is the letter si
299. u the printer drivers with a mono driver SO you Can use your printer as a monochrome printer You must install the mono driver on your computer Following steps guide you through the step by step installation process 1 O Ul A 8 9 Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on Or your computer and printer are connected to the network Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears Click Cancel It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below English X SAMSUNG Cancel If the confirmation window appears click Finish Click Start 5 Printers and Faxes Select Add Printer When Add Printer Wizard appears click Next Select Local printer attached to this computer and Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer then click Next Go to step 13 If your computer does not find the printer then follow the next step Select Next in the Select a Printer Port window In the Select a Printer Port window select Have Disk 10 Click Browse to find a mono driver for your printer ex Windows XP 32 bit Select CD ROM drive gt Printer PC MONO gt WINXP 2000 VISTA 32 11 Select inf file and click Open 12 Click OK in the Install From Disk window 13 Select a mono driver in the Printers field and
300. u want to install from the list and then click Next Select Printer Port em Select a port that will be used for your printer TCP IP Port C Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port Select a printer from the list below lf you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list IP Port Name NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing t the installer from detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on Uodas this PC before continuing with the installation lt Back Nee Cancel e If you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any item individually 11 NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear Connect Device Setup can not find a connected device Check connection between your computer and the printer Please refer to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Turn on the power of the device 3 IF New Hardware Wizard is appeared close it 4 Click
301. uction Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product Your machine provides printing copying scanning and faxing functions This chapter includes e Special features e Machine overview e Control panel overview e Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons e Understanding the Status LED e Menu map Note Some features are optional Please check the specifications sections Page 15 1 Special features Your new machine is equipped with special features Print with excellent quality and speed e You can print in full range of colors using yellow magenta cyan and black pr e You can print with a resolution of up to 9 600 x 600 dpi pode effective output 600 x 600 x 4 dpi See Software scosso section e Your machine prints A4 sized paper at up to 38 ppm and letter sized paper at up to 40 ppm e For duplex printing your machine prints A4 sized paper at up to 33 ppm and letter sized paper at up to 35 ppm Handle different paper options with flexibility Li e The multi purpose tray supports letterhead envelopes E labels transparencies custom sized media postcards and heavy paper The multi purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper e The 520 sheet tray 1 and 520 sheet optional tray support plain paper in various sizes e The 2 100 sheet optional high tray support plain paper in various sizes Create professional documents e Print watermarks You can customize you
302. up Printer or Options in your Print window click it instead Then click Properties on the next screen Click OK to close the printer properties window To start the print job click OK or Print in the Print window Printing to a file PRN You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your purpose To create a file 1 Check the Print to file box at the Print window General Select Printer sl Add Printer F Print to file Pi Status Ready Location Comment Page Range ll Number of copies 1 lt PB 2 Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then click OK Basic Printing Printer Settings You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you need when using your printer When the printer properties are displayed you can review and change the settings needed for your print job Your printer properties window may differ depending on your operating system This Software User s Guide shows the Properties window for Windows XP Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use If you access printer properties through the Printers folder you can view additional Windows based tabs refer to your Windows User s Guide and the Printer tab see Printer Tab on page 18 NOTE e Most Windows applications will override settings you spec
303. ur finished document The binding options are e Long Edge Binding Which is the conventional layout used in book binding e Short Edge Binding Which is the type often used with calendars l From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu 2 Select the Layout Printer HJ Layout B Pages per Sheet 1 Ke Layout Direction F3 P Ger Two Side d Printing Preview Save As PDF Fax A Mac OS 10 3 3 Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing option 4 Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the paper CAUTION If you have selected duplex printing and then try to print multiple copies of a document the printer may not print the document in the way you want In case of Collated copy if your document has odd pages the last page of the first copy and the first page of the next copy will be printed on the front and back of one sheet In case of Uncollated copy the Same page will be printed on the front and back of one Sheet Therefore if you need multiple copies of a document and you want those copies on both sides of the paper you must print them one at a time as separate print jobs Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Scanning You can scan docoments using Image Capture program Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program Scanning with USB 1 2 3 NOTE If No Image Capture device connecte
304. use Fax If you use other Internet services DSL ISDN VolP you can improve the connection quality by using the Micro filter The Micro filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet quality Since the DSL Micro filter is not provided with the machine contact your Internet Service provider for use on DSL Micro filter ar o 1 Line port ma 2 Micro filter 3 DSL modem i Telephone line e To use advanced features of the fax press Machine Setup on the control panel and Admin Setting gt Setup gt Fax Setup Page 10 4 Preparing to fax Before you send or receive a fax you need to connect the supplied line cord to the wall jack Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection The method of making a telephone connection is varies from one country to another Note If you want to add fax feature to the machine check the option lists Page 13 1 and contact the purchasing point to order When you purchase a fax kit install the kit by following the steps described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the kit After installing the fax kit set the machine to use this feature Page 14 3 Understanding the Fax screen To use the fax feature press Fax on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press F to go to the Main screen Note If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not appear on the Main screen Basic tab Fa
305. ve jammed paper by inside of scanner document failed to and remove the actuate the gate jammed original lowering guide 1a or sensor within the Page 12 1 1b correct time after Paper jam inside Paperjammedinthe Open the stacker actuating the scan finisher s duplex stacker door and remove sensor jammed paper by When the machine lowering guide 1a or is on jammed paper 1b is detected in the P Jam insid DADPF aper Jam Inside Paper has jammed Clear the jam of duplex path during duplex Page 12 9 Original paperjam The lead edge of the Lift up the document printing while reversing document failed to input traz and remove paper in scanner actuate the duplex the jammed original sensor within the Page 12 1 in the registration Page 12 8 correct time when area the document was Scanner locking The CCD Charged Unlock the CCD lock fed the wrong way switch is locked or Couple Device lock Page 1 3 Or tum off Paper jam at exit Paperjammedinthe Pull jammed paper aadd kia has been locked the machine and on of finisher stacker exit part from the stacker exit OCCUITE The CCD does not again Try again If detect its home the problem persists Paper Jam at the Paper has jammed Clear the jam location or move call for service bottom of duplex during duplex Page 12 9 path printing Paper Jam inside Paper has jammed Clear the jam of machine 12 13 lt Troubleshooting gt Message
306. w indicates is reached The toner cartridge is almost empty There is a problem in the control of DC motor unit This message appears when the toner is completely empty and your machine stops printing Replace the toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine toner cartridge Ensure a replacement cartridge is in stock Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Message Did not supply enough xxx toner Remove seal tape 4 reinstall Did not supply enough xxx toner Please open close door Fax memory is almost full Print Or remove received fax Job Fax memory is full Print or remove received fax Job Finisher door is open Close it Finisher error zzz Please turn off then on Fuser error zzz Please turn off then on Fuser unit is not installed correctly Install it LSU error zzz Please turn off then on Meaning Suggested solutions Not supplied toner to the imaging unit The machine received several papers with many images and it cannot supply the toner properly There is no more available fax memory No more fax data can be received Available fax memory is now 1MB The finisher cover is not securely latched There is a problem in the finisher unit There is a problem in the fuser unit working The fuser unit is not installed or correctly There is a problem in the control of
307. w samsung com th 02 689 3232 TRINIDAD amp 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com TOBAGO 7864 latin TURKEY 444 77 11 www samsung com ir U A E 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ae 8000 4726 U K 0845 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com uk 7864 U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 www samsung com us 7864 UKRAINE 8 800 502 0000 www samsung ua UZBEKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz ru VENEZUELA 0 800 100 5303 www samsung com latin VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www samsung com vn CONTENTS About this USERS guide apres cresivstaeiseanenceanadacsmumnssienacecstagenantan bye hsanauyemciesnes ncaa uentiasdan ia nein suattauientasanausesaniasaatssueedemeneieaesis i Finding more WTOKIMMAUON aaa Naa Akala i Safety and Regulatory Information 11 771717111 ii 1 Introduction Special etc 100 a gt aa a a AA AA AA AA 1 1 Machine AA AA AA 1 3 POON NEN a AA AA 1 3 Rear VIEW Uu a 1 4 Control panel OVGIWICW 2 Kaanak kana disri aaa AN ALA 1 5 Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons 1011111700 1 6 TUCO OE 9 aa AA AANO AA AA NA AA ee ee ee eee ee eee 1 6 Machine Setup button 200 11 Aa 1 6 Job AUS DULO esac ese cates NAA oe senna E E E E E ES 1 6 Power Saver button aa AA NA AA AA AG 1 6 MGA DUNON maa AA AA AA AA a 1 6 Understanding the Status LED AA AA AA AA 1 7 O a AA AA AA AA AA AA 1 7 KONUTA saa a ELA AA AA ee AA AA AA eee 1 7 MA SCCO aa AA AA AA a a AN 1 7 Machine CU DUNGON NA Ga
308. window is similar e You can check your printer name in the supplied CD ROM Printing a Document When you print with a Macintosh you need to check the printer software setting in each application you use Follow these steps to print from a Macintosh 1 Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup Document Setup in some applications 3 Choose your paper size orientation scaling and other options and click OK Settings Page Attributes E Format for Paper Size l US Letter 21 59 om S ec Scale 100 ab Orientation foes mg a a A Mac OS 10 3 4 Open the File menu and click Print 5 Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print 6 Click Print when you finish setting the options Make sure that your printer is selected Na Cancel ini apa printer similar and Macintosh OS version Layout list to access the following features Presets Standard Layout v Changing Printer Settings You can use advanced printing features when using your Printer ke From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu The printer name which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the printer in use Except for the name the composition of the printer properties window is NOTE The setting options may
309. with the largest file size e Archival Record For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size of the output lt Using USB flash memory gt e OCR Produces scanned output for OCR software You can expect the highest quality images e Simple Scan Used for a simple document with text only The file size of output is small e Custom Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen File Format You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt File Format mm PDF JPEG sangiko Page TEF ENE iidr Fage TFF e PDF Scans originals in PDF format e Single Page TIFF Scans the originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format and several originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file e Multi Page TIFF Scans originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format but several originals are scanned as one file e JPEG Scans original in JPEG format e BMP Scans original in BMP format Note The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode File Policy You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the scan job through USB If the USB memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name you can rename or overwrite it Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt File Policy m Rename Overwrite e Rename If the USB memory already h
310. x creating Mailbox 6 9 deleting the data of the Mailbox 6 10 Mailbox List 6 9 Mailbox No 6 9 Mailbox Passcode 6 9 polling 6 8 printing a Mailbox 6 10 sending to remote Mailbox 6 10 storing the originals 6 9 Maintenance 11 1 maintenance parts 11 8 toner cartridge 11 3 memory DIMM installing 14 1 message on the display screen 12 11 Mono 7 9 9 4 multi purpose tray 1 3 N network port 1 4 requirements 3 2 setting up 3 1 10 6 notification receiving a fax in Mailbox 6 9 N up copy 5 5 O OCR 7 9 9 5 On Hook Dial 1 5 hardware 1 5 sending a fax 6 3 optional service 10 7 optional tray 1 2 1 3 13 1 ordering supplies 13 1 original size copying 5 2 scanning 7 8 9 3 original type copying 5 4 faxing 6 6 scanning 7 8 9 4 originals 4 1 clearing jam 12 1 loading in the DADF 4 1 loading on the scanner glass 4 1 output options 10 3 2 page numbering in copying 10 4 paper changing the size 4 7 clearing jam 12 3 loading in the multi purpose tray 4 8 loading in the optional tray 4 7 loading in the tray1 4 7 paper feeding problems 12 15 setting the paper size of the tray 4 9 phonebook fax 6 6 fax phonebook from SyncThru Web Ser vice 6 7 polling deleting the polling document 6 8 polling a remote fax 6 8 polling from remote Mailbox 6 8 printing the polling document 6 8 storing the originals for polling 6 8 PostScript driver features 2 2 problems 12 22 Power Save 3 6 Power Saver 1 5 1 6 hardware 1 5 1
311. x No 9199661877 e Fax number input area Shows the recipient s fax number using the number keypad on the control panel If you configured the phone book press Individual or Group Page 6 6 e Add No Lets you add more destinations e Deletes the last digit entered e Removes all digits of the selected entry e Remove Removes the selected fax number entry e Remove All Removes all the fax numbers in the input area 6 1 lt Faxing Optional gt e Address Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from your machine or from SyncThru Web Service Page 6 7 e Duplex Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the original both sides of the original e Resolution Adjusts the resolution options Advanced tab Bak e Original Size Selects the size of the original document Press OK to update current setting e Delay Send Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without your intervention Page 6 3 e Priority Send Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations Page 6 4 e Polling Used when the receiver requests the document to be faxed remotely at sender s absence or vice versa In order to use the polling function the originals must be previously stored in the machine Page 6 8 e Mailbox Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine memory which are ready to be polled You can use a mailbox on the same machine you are using or the o
312. y Executive Ad Multi purpose tray Statement High capacity feeder Fax mode Letter A4 Legal Ttray 1 Optional tray High capacity feeder a 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond only b Only the optional fax kit is installed Guidelines for selecting and storing print media When selecting or loading paper envelopes or other print materials keep these guidelines in mind Always use print media that conform with the specifications listed on page 4 3 Attempting to print on damp curled wrinkled or torn paper can cause paper jams and poor print quality For the best print quality use only high quality copier grade paper specifically recommended for use in laser printers Avoid using the following media types Paper with embossed lettering perforations or a texture that is too smooth or too rough Erasable bond paper Multi paged paper Synthetic paper and thermally reactive paper Carbonless paper and Tracing paper Use of these types of paper could result in paper jams chemical smells and damage to your machine Store print media in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use it Place cartons on pallets or shelves not on the floor Do not place heavy objects on top of the paper whether it is packaged or unpackaged Keep it away from moisture or other conditions that can cause it to wrinkle or curl Store unused print media at temperatures between 15 C and 30 C The relative humidity should be betwe
313. yncThru Web Service Web server embedded on your network print server which allows you to Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments Customize email settings and set up address book for scanning to emall Customize server settings and set up address book for scanning to the FTP or SMB servers Customize printer copy and fax settings e SetIP Utility program allowing you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP IP protocol See page 3 4 for Using the SetIP program Installing the software You have to install the machine software for printing and scanning The software includes drivers applications and other user friendly programs Note e The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as a network machine If you want to connect a machine with a USB cable refer to Software section e The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating system The procedure and popup window which appears during the installation may differ depending on the operating system the printer feature or the interface in use See Software section lt Getting Started gt 1 Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed Page 3 1 All applications should be closed on your computer before beginning installation Insert the Printer Software CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The
314. zed paper then the machine prints the output first letter legal and letter in order from several trays e Other preset values Allows user to easily select commonly used values lt Copying gt Reducing or enlarging copies Press the Basic tab gt Reduce Enlarge then use left right arrows to reduce or enlarge an image on the paper Press more to see the values e Original 100 Prints texts or images the same size as originals e Auto Fit Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the output paper e Other preset values Allows you to easily select commonly used values Note The Custom option is different depending on where the originals is placed In the DADF 25 200 adjustment is possible And in the scanner glass 25 400 adjustment is possible Copying on both sides of originals Duplex Press the Basic tab gt Duplex then use left right arrows to select Duplex value Note If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides of original the message Another Page appears after the first page copied At this time load the original s the other side facing down and press Yes then the machine starts scanning the second page of your original Press more to see the detail values e 1 gt 1 Sided Scans one side of an original and prints on one side of the paper this function produces exactly the same print out from originals BE e 1 gt 2 Sided Scans

Samsung CLX-8380ND

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents